JP7459994B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a jackpot lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed when a certain condition is met, and the result of this jackpot lottery is announced by a variable game in which decorative symbols are displayed variably and stopped on a display device such as an LCD. In the variable game, from the time when the decorative symbols are displayed variably to the time when the stop table is displayed, a variable game presentation that suggests the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed on various presentation devices such as a display device. This variable game presentation includes main presentations that are executed continuously from the time when the decorative symbols are displayed variably to the time when the stop table is displayed, and various preview presentations that are executed during this main presentation. Preview presentations include presentations that suggest the expectation of a jackpot in the variable game, and presentations that clearly indicate or suggest events that may occur in the future in the variable game, such as clearly indicating or suggesting the direction of development of the presentation in the variable game presentation.

In general, the preview performance is executed as a step-up performance, a dialogue performance, a cut-in performance, a mini character performance, etc., and each preview performance is determined separately from the main performance at the start of the variable play. Therefore, the contents indicated or suggested by each preview performance may overlap. Specifically, for example, the step-up performance may first indicate or suggest that it will develop into a super performance, and then the dialogue performance may indicate or suggest that it will develop into a super performance. In this case, since the preview performance executed first indicates or suggests that it will develop into a super reach performance, even if the later preview performance indicates or suggests that it will develop into a super reach performance, the player will not obtain new information from the later preview performance. On the other hand, the player expects to obtain new information from the later preview performance. As a result, if the same content is indicated or suggested multiple times in one variable play, the player may feel uncomfortable with the later preview performance, which may cause a decrease in interest in the game.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198398

By the way, it is important for a gaming machine to attract attention and interest in the game, and to increase the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest in the game and improve the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification performances (preview performances);
A notification performance execution decision means (51) for deciding whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification performances;
A notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determination means (51);
a display performance execution means (51) for executing a display performance (e.g., a development performance) of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification performance of the predetermined notification content after the notification performance is executed when the notification performance (e.g., a development performance notice performance) of the predetermined notification content is executed;
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
A means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
A means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
having
a means for executing a notification performance of a notification content including, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing, as the notification performance when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing;
The additional performance information is characterized in that it is information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification performance.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing door, a crane device, and a game ball retention section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6. FIG. A 7-segment display section displays specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the croon device, and a non-set value. A diagram for explaining a prescribed period. 10(A) is a sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section, and FIG. 11(C) 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of how alphabets are displayed on a 7-segment display section. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a performance display monitor of a performance information display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display section of the performance information display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 21. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 . 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a numeral display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 38 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37. FIG. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of controlling a segment display section and an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area. 6A and 6B are diagrams for explaining a control example of a seven-segment display unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . A diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of a jackpot game. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; 11 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of screen transition on the pattern display unit in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62 . FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 64. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off a lamp display section. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during a jackpot game. A figure showing an example of a display screen during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the lamp display unit. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of a preview performance setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 72. A diagram showing the relationship between various preview performances and preview contents. A figure showing an example of a screen on the pattern display section for a pseudo consecutive preview performance. FIGS. 76(A) to 76(C) are diagrams showing the relationship between the preview content of the preview performance and the preview level, and FIG. 76(D) is a diagram for explaining the storage area for resetting the preview content. A diagram for explaining the timing of execution of a preview performance. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the pseudo-consecutive preview performance setting process executed in the preview performance setting process of Figure 73. Figure 79 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the steps of the step-up performance setting process executed in the preview performance setting process of Figure 73, and Figure 79 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up performance timing selection table referenced to determine the execution timing of the step-up performance in the step-up performance setting process of Figure 79 (A). The figure which shows an example of the step-up performance type selection table referred to in order to determine a step-up performance in the step-up performance setting process of FIG. 79(A). FIG. 81(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the dialogue production setting process executed in the preview production setting process of FIG. 73, and FIG. 81(B) is the execution of the dialogue production in the dialogue production setting process of FIG. 81(A). The figure which shows an example of a line performance timing selection table referred to in order to determine timing. A figure showing an example of a line performance type selection table referenced to determine the line performance in the line performance setting process of Figure 81 (A). Figure 83 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the steps of the character group performance setting process executed in the preview performance setting process of Figure 73, and Figures 83 (B) and 83 (C) are figures showing an example of a character group performance timing selection table referenced to determine the execution timing of the character group performance in the character group performance setting process of Figure 83 (A). A figure showing an example of a character group performance type selection table referenced to determine the character group performance in the character group performance setting process of Figure 83 (A). 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the preview effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the preview performance reconfiguration process executed in the preview performance process of Figure 85. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect resetting process executed in the preview effect process of FIG. 85; A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the preview performance reconfiguration process executed in the preview performance process of Figure 85. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect resetting process executed in the preview effect process of FIG. 85; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a preview performance setting process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect resetting process executed in the preview effect setting process of FIG. 91; 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect resetting process executed in the preview effect setting process of FIG. 91; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview performance processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for additional information display processing executed in the preview performance processing of Figure 93. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of additional information display processing executed in the preview production processing of FIG. 93. The figure which shows the example of a screen for demonstrating the 1st aspect and 2nd aspect of a pseudo consecutive notice production process, and the example of a display of additional information. A figure showing an example screen to explain the first and second modes of the development preview performance processing, and an example of the display of additional information. A figure showing an example screen to explain the first and second modes of the jackpot advance notice processing, and an example of the display of additional information. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for explaining a display example of additional information.

The following describes the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings to facilitate understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is an example of the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Fig. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front/rear, left/right, and up/down used in this embodiment are defined by the front/rear direction D1, the up/down direction D2, and the left/right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is attached to an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, a play ball game machine, etc. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a variable game performance that is executed in a variable game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. These buttons are operated to perform operations such as presentations.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position that can be operated by the player. Also, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

In addition, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operation of the touch keys by the player. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or panel 25 during the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic play is performed by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described below, and to lead the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs sound. Note that the installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has built-in light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects by changing the lighting color and flashing modes such as turning on and off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having its left end rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball firing mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a clone device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. The back side of the game board 31 is provided with ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the entry of game balls, corresponding to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, respectively. The game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The variable winning hole 316 is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 31, and can be entered by a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31. The game ball that passes through the through-hole 316b of the variable winning hole 316 is guided to the crane device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect game balls that pass through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning hole 315.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) recognizes that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, which will be described later. The special out ball detection command shown in FIG. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not the game ball is restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening/closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the game ball from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 includes a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment parts 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. . Thereby, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a, and prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling off the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the game balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable prize opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable prize opening 316, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable prize opening 316 has a penetration part 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable prize opening 316 and is guided to the croon device 37 via the penetration part 316b and the guide path 316c. Note that the guideway 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. Thereby, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning a prize opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetration part 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display on the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the round game (unit game) described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened until a predetermined time passes or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning hole 316. This is a game state including an opening/closing execution mode. The 16R guaranteed variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are played 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This pattern display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 performs various image presentations such as a variable display presentation of decorative patterns according to the lottery results in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, and a variable game presentation performed in conjunction with the variable display presentation. In addition, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the decorative pattern changing display performance in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in sequence vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. Also, in this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in variable play, the display of changes in decorative patterns is executed so that the change in all decorative patterns stops after a preset display time has elapsed from the start of the display of changes in patterns in the pattern display section 341. More specifically, in the display of changes in decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns change along a preset direction of change (e.g., horizontally, vertically, etc.), and the change in multiple decorative patterns stops in sequence. Then, when the change in decorative patterns on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of changes in the decorative patterns ends.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "16R sure strange jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot", decorative symbols of the same type will be displayed lined up on the active line, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. Further, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the active line, but it is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed variable jackpot", the symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot among the decorative symbols, is lined up on the active line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a state in which the symbol combinations such as "333", which have been set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the active line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", among the decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols that are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating normal jackpots, such as "222" and "444", indicating variable probability jackpots are selected. A state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the active line (for example, "323" or "723", etc.) is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable play, a variable play effect is displayed that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is a "16R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 16R variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 5R variable jackpot.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, when the gaming state shifts to a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot game performance including an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance is displayed.

It is also possible to provide a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown) on the game board 31. The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a radio wave is fraudulently input to the ball entry sensor 314a, 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the Kroon device 37 distributes game balls that enter the variable winning opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening and closing door 319, the Kroon device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is an oblique view of the Kroon device 37, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the crane device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 that surrounds the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball opening 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. This special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed into a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Further, a first guiding member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention part 38.

It is also possible to provide the first guide member 375 with a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10, is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a specified period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably identified with 7 pieces of information. Also, since the game setting value has 6 stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, and therefore all non-set values can be identified with 35 pieces of information. In other words, the game machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a prescribed number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained in a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 a function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to retain a number of game balls 99 that is difficult to achieve using only the game ball retention section 38, using the first guide member 375. This makes it possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various components, even by providing the first guide member 375 with a function to retain game balls 99 as well as the game ball retention section 38, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by using the special out ball passage 374. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period of time, and there is a possibility that the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are allowed to stay in a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit number to the specified number (make the limit number match the specified number). In this case, for example, if the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is presented, all non-set values are displayed in one specific period. Information to identify the person may be presented. In addition, when information is presented about the number of game balls 99 that meet a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball opening 373, for example, the number corresponding to the number of winnings in the lottery, Since the expected number of information is presented according to the probability, and this expected number of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that not all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 during a game.

In addition, as a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention part 38, the first guiding member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game balls 99 near the special out ball opening 373 (by causing a ball jam), a special It is conceivable to restrict entry of the game balls 99 into the out ball passage 374. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period with a simple mechanical configuration without requiring any complicated configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right side (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 is no longer expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special The ball is handled as an out ball at the time when it is detected by the out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball opening 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. is formed. Further, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, as well as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

The game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to such a clown device 37 by a guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided by the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 in the clone device 37 is delayed. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 are usually out of the ball mouth due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy or colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 or other game balls 99. Enter the pitch at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with other game balls, and enter the special out ball opening 373. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. . In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of ball landing or the expected number of balls hitting in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value early, but it is also possible to realistically specify the set value. It becomes possible. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated if the setting value is identified early, such as when the setting value is low, and prevents the gaming machine from feeling bored due to the inability to identify the setting value. It becomes possible to prevent the game at No. 10 from being ended.

In this embodiment, the special out ball port 373 is provided at the high bottom 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball port 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373, so that the special out ball port 373 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball port 378. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball port 373 by other means. For example, it is possible to provide an obstruction means for obstructing the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball port 373 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle that obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 373, such as a wall portion surrounding the special out ball port 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by spraying air in the periphery of the special out ball port 373 are conceivable.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening and closing the special out ball opening 373 may be provided, and this opening/closing part may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373. Good too.

In addition, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 into the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 is not limited to the croon device 37, but may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve or a rotating member or a nail driven into the game board 31, it may be possible to divide it into the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373. .

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention section 38 receives the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37, and retains the game balls 99 until a specific period has elapsed. It is. Then, after a specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and 7 segments are displayed according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 until the predetermined period has elapsed. A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the Cloon device, and a non-set value. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a prescribed period displayed on a 7-segment display section.

Note that, in the following, with reference to FIG. 9, the specific period is described as a period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the predetermined period is described as a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted, and the "prescribed period" is described as a period during which all or part of the numbers (specific information) indicating non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "prescribed period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period", "prescribed period", and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of the jackpot game (opening) to the end of the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game (the start of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period. That is, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the start of the ending). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), in the case of winning a normal jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a special jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a special jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), for all jackpot games that are played until the jackpot streak ends with a normal jackpot game when a normal jackpot is won in high probability mode, a specific period is set from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode for that jackpot game. In other words, in a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games played during the jackpot streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or winning timing, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Cloon device 37 during the specific period of one jackpot game, as described below, is 7. Segments A to G of the segment display section 39 are subject to lighting/extinguishing control during the ending of the jackpot game, which is a specified period. In other words, the prescribed period is based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the specified period, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This is set as the period during which the 7-segment display section 39 displays a number indicating a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the game setting value (setting value).

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, a number specifying a game setting value (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery set in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, according to the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described below. In addition, in the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game, if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. Note that if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is less than seven, no numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-setting values may be displayed, and the setting value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-setting values. For example, when the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value, and when the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value. It can be specified that 2 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be specified that the game setting value 3 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. When the number 4 is displayed, it can be specified that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value, and when the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value. By displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be identified that the non-set value is the game setting value 2 to 6, so it is understood that the set value is the game setting value 1. can. Similarly, by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7 segment display section 39, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 2, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 are displayed on the 7 segment display section 39. You can understand that the setting value is game setting value 3 by displaying the five numbers , and when five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the setting value is game setting value 3. It can be understood that the setting value is 4, and five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be understood that the setting value is the game setting value 5, and the 7-segment display section 39 shows 1. By displaying five numbers from 5 to 5, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 6.

Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Furthermore, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G on the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, all segments A to G are controlled. Control for displaying the next priority number will not start unless it becomes a target. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, it is easier to identify all non-set values than when control to display the next priority number is started at the stage when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped. A number of specific conditions must be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty until all non-set values are identified, and by extension, the difficulty in recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short gaming time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped by the player in a short time, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the playing time on the gaming machine 10, It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate.

In addition, when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, control to display the number of the next priority may be started. For example, when the priority of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ..., when it is grasped that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is "1" by making segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", the control to display the number "2" of the next priority may be started without making segment G, which is the seventh in the control order, the control. However, when segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be displayed next after all segments A to G become the control target, even if the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become the control target, control of segments A to G to display the number to be displayed next is not started until all segments A to G become the control target. Therefore, even if the player recognizes a number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control target, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, if the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have become the control target, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In contrast, if control to display the next number with priority is started when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, segments A to G that do not contribute to guessing the non-set value will not become the control target after one non-set value is identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Cloon device 37 starts from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. This is until the end. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode starts, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends (the ending of the normal jackpot game starts). (the point in time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. This is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), if you win a certain variable jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first win is a certain variable jackpot and the jackpot series starts), the jackpot series will start for a predetermined period. This is the period from the start of the probability-variable jackpot game for the first win, which is the trigger, until the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot, which is the trigger for ending the series of jackpots, is ended. That is, in the case of consecutive jackpot games, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38, but is set in plurality depending on the number of jackpot games to be started within the predetermined period.

When a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot winning streak. Therefore, a specific period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In addition, a specific period for which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the croon device 37 is cumulatively counted is set from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for the jackpot game for a normal jackpot, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period has elapsed, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37), and information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and at the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot has elapsed, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the specified period. This prevents the game from ending before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or guessed, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed continues playing the game. Therefore, even if a player does not know the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed, the non-set values can be identified or guessed, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior by other players who play aiming for the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed.

In addition, by setting the specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot series. Therefore, in a consecutive game jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in a single shot win, and the more times the jackpot game is executed, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, it is more likely that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 will be greater in a consecutive jackpot than in a single hit, and in a consecutive jackpot, the greater the number of consecutive hits. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 will increase. As a result, the player not only has a higher expected value of the gaming value that can be acquired as the number of successive jackpots increases, but also obtains more information for identifying or estimating the non-set value, and the non-set value and even the set value. The benefit is that the value is easier to guess or identify.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and is not limited to the start of the jackpot game, when the opening/closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends). It may be the point in time when the Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally occurs after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening/closing execution mode for one jackpot game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied when a game ball 99 enters the variable prize opening 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 (based on the number of non-set values), information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after a specific period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, you can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period has passed. It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 and specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the displayed content.

In addition, the start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) is started. All you have to do is set it as a jackpot game. Preferably, at the time when the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode), for example, a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first win ends). It's okay. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so one At least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value is guaranteed for the first hit.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the point at which the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. It is possible that Further, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time saving mode that is normally transitioned to after the jackpot ends. In addition, although this embodiment is explained on the premise of a loop variable machine, other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and mixed machines can be used for a predetermined period depending on the mode. It is also possible to set For example, with a V-ST machine, if there is no V prize on the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as in the case of a regular jackpot on a loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize on the first win (probable variable jackpot) ), the start of the first jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode is the start of a predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot without V winning, or the end of a prescribed number of jackpot drawings in the high probability mode, etc. It is conceivable to set it as the end of a predetermined period.

The specified period may also be set to the period during which variable play is executed (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of a jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the specified period may be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and may be set to the period during which the player stays in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples of the period include a period until a normal winning lottery is drawn, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the general winning port 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The predetermined period may also be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variable play may be the specified period, or a portion of one variable play may be the specified period. When a portion of one variable play is the specified period, the specified period may be the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state, the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when a development performance such as a special ready state begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance ends, the period during which a development performance is executed, etc.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even outside the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as a period in which a variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the croon device 37 determines whether the game ball 99 hit to the left side area of the game board 31 is normally hit to the left or not. The position where 99 is allocated to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) ) may also be provided. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (right-handed strike of the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, you can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314. Can be done.

Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The specific condition is that, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by a distribution means such as the Krun device 37 entering the special out ball port 373 during a specified period, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball port 373, such as the game ball 99 passing through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 entering one of the various winning ports 313 to 316.

In addition, the game balls 99 that enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314, or that pass through the through gate 317, may be guided to a distribution means such as the Krun device 37, and a specific condition may be that the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball hole 373. In this case, too, it is possible to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game normally, without performing any special shooting.

Further, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. The specific event in this case may be either an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous event for the player. If a specific event is advantageous to the player, in addition to the benefits obtained by the occurrence of the specific event, the player may receive all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value). You can get more. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player may take all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. You can get more. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (a jackpot game being executed a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more), winning a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (one time or more) (including 1) or more (continuously variable or normal jackpot games are executed more than a predetermined number of times (including once)), the number of successive jackpots reaches a predetermined number or more (normally variable or normal jackpot games are played more than a predetermined number of times (including once)) winning a jackpot consecutively for a predetermined number of times or more), reaching a predetermined number or more of jackpot drawings before winning a jackpot, winning a game ball 99 that exceeds the upper limit number in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. (Over-winning) may occur.

The specific event may be the execution of a specific effect that is set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to any of a non-reach effect and a reach effect, and may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect, and an ending effect. Typically, the specific effect may be a premium effect in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed in a variable game effect, or an effect that indicates that a reserved consecutive win will be executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (the reserved wins include the lottery result of the jackpot at a specific time point of the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the open/close execution mode, the end of the open/close execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game). Furthermore, the specific event may be a stop display or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) of a decorative pattern in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped at "777", when it is stopped at a specific out-of-reach number such as "767", when it is stopped at a specific non-out-of-reach number (variable number) such as "367", and when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, such as "7 development 7", where the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed as the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the specific condition may be the occurrence of multiple specific events of a specific combination.

The specific condition may also be satisfied in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and may be satisfied, for example, when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described below. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value, for example, based on whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the specified period for displaying specific information or a part of it (special information) that indicates a non-set value when specific conditions are met is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of a jackpot game, and other It may be the timing, and it is conceivable to set it according to the relationship with a predetermined period, the relationship with a specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is typically set after a predetermined period has elapsed, as will be explained in the second embodiment below. For example, it may be after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the predetermined period is set as the execution period of a variable game, for example, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in a variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the reach state, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. Possible timings include the timing at which the development performance is started, the development performance being executed, etc. In other words, the prescribed period may be set to a period in which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display section 341 by changing the decorative symbols, it is also possible to display specific information on the symbol display section 341 at the same time. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the variable game by displaying specific information.

Here, FIG. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 8, FIG. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described below is in the upper limit position, and FIG. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described below with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 that has stayed in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that the game ball 99 has been retained in the retention lane 381, and also makes it possible to visually confirm the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently using resin or the like. This makes it easier to grasp the number of game balls 99 that have been retained in the retention lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, or by displaying an image on the pattern display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 is for detecting when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves in the ejection lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within a specific period. used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384. It is determined whether the game ball 99 has moved on the discharge lane 382. In addition, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the outside in step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. In the process, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and displays the number on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The content is controlled (see the command determination process in FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40).

Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the special out ball sensor 384, for example, the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the number of special out balls is counted in the audio lamp control device 5 based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper part 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and with the stopper portion 383 at the upper limit position, it becomes possible to retain the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip part does not protrude upward, and when the stopper part 383 is at the lower limit position, the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 can be ejected via the ejection lane 382 (Fig. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the ejection lane 382 is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Note that the means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the retention lane 381 and allowing the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, but may also be, for example, a longitudinally movable stopper. Other means such as a stopper part that can be rotated between a standing state and a prone state may also be used. Alternatively, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of magnetic force or electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or electromagnetic force. . Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, by making the retention lane 381 wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are retained, and by moving the retention lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are stored in the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to . In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening through which the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game balls 99 can be stored in the retention lane 381, and a position where the game balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the game board 31. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where it can be discharged to the rear side of the storage lane 381. Furthermore, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, the game balls 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a seven-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabets displayed on the seven-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the 7-segment display section 39 consists of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and as shown in FIG. 11(B), at least the numbers 1 to 6, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the alphabet of F. In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display section 39 includes a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B)) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. From the value (numeric information), multiple (5) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 The numbers (specific information) indicating each of the (specific numerical information)) are displayed as numbers by lighting or extinguishing each segment A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, and the non-set value is the game setting value. 2, segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, and if the non-set value is game setting value 3, segments A to D and G are lit. If the non-setting value is the game setting value 4, the number 4 will be displayed by lighting segments B, C, F, and G, and the non-setting value will be the gaming setting value. If the value is 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G will be lit to display the number 5, and if the non-set value is game setting value 6, segments A, C to G will be displayed. When lit, the number 6 is displayed. Further, in this embodiment, the dot point DP is lit at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, clearly indicating that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

In addition, the numbers corresponding to non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order that is determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as described below (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as described below, the control order for turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

In the seven-segment display unit 39, the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, as described below, and a number or a part of a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but indicates a part of specific information indicating a non-set value, and corresponds to an indication of special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using a part of the multiple segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) on the seven-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify the non-set value when a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, but also can guess the non-set value based on the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, players can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the number, which increases the fun of the game.

It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is a control target on the 7-segment display section 39 may or may not be clearly shown to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is to be controlled, it is easier to estimate the set value than when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to estimate the set value. has been done. In addition, when making it clear to the player that each segment A to G is the control target, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, it is clearly shown to the player that the segment is the control target, and the control target is It is conceivable to make it clear to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting it in a different color from the case where the segment is lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying the non-set value with an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, the letter A may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 1, the letter B may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 2, the letter C may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 3, the letter D may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 4, the letter E may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 5, and the letter F may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, which are located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing normal symbols (normal symbols), and displays the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, which is triggered by winning through the through gate 317 and determines whether or not to open the electric role 315b, by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pairs (displaying a variable normal symbol) when a winning symbol wins through the through gate 317, and displays the result of the normal symbol winning lottery by turning on or off each LED after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first special symbol display section 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the first prize opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven segment display device (displays the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a prize is won in the first winning hole 314, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the second winning port 315, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the second winning port 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first reservation number display section 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the number of reservations N of the first special symbol of the variable display caused by winning the first prize opening 314 based on the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

The second reservation number display section 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reservation number M of the second special symbol of the variable display caused by winning the second prize opening 315 according to the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 also has a built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, out ball sensor 318a, special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. Furthermore, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 sends a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game start command, to the audio lamp control device 5. Outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process in FIG. 26 described below, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described below, when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the varying patterns. The variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results, fluctuation pattern, and hold number N or hold number M in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described below increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described below when there is an increase in the hold number N or hold number M (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process in FIG. 22 described below).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 23 described below when transitioning to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, by receiving the jackpot game start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can know that not only the jackpot game is about to start, but also that the opening is about to start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice and lamp control device 5 may know that the opening is about to start by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process in FIG. 23 described later. Note that the sound lamp control device 5 can know that the opening ends and the open/close execution mode starts by the round game start command, but it is also possible to set an opening end command at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, or to set an open/close execution mode start command at the start of the open/close execution mode. Also, a command indicating the round number of the round game that is about to start may be set separately from the round game start command at the start of the round game, and the command may be sent to the sound lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the corresponding round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in the jackpot play control process in the main process in Figure 23 described below.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command shown in FIG. 20 described later. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display section 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the changed setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal with a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts and executes the main timer interrupt process described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that the oscillator circuit and divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute the jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used to select a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of miss. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 that determines the variable display time in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341. The lottery counter 412a also includes a normal win random number counter C4 used to select whether the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an open electric role state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will be simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reservation storage area 412b includes a first reservation storage area REA, a second reservation storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the first special symbol display section 362 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a reservation number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the second special symbol display section 363 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The winning/losing information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing a process according to the control program. In addition, a lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in either the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, for the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/losing information is stored in an available area in the order of priority from the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. The number of holding areas NAA in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the win/fail information shows that the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4 are vacant in priority order. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved jackpots in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing the winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the display of changing patterns in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341 begins. Specifically, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and when there is no winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the reserved number memory area NAB is 0, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

Note that the difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more. In this case, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the reservation area with a larger number is given priority and moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as win/fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The validity information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/losing information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the pending storage area 412b at the timing when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is set to two types, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is a guaranteed jackpot state, according to the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area in ROM 411. Here, FIG. 14(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B), a plurality of win/lose tables are provided as a low probability mode win/lose table and a high probability mode win/lose table, in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) varies according to the game setting value. The low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table each include six win/lose tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, in that order, which is more advantageous for the player.

At game setting value 1, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 2, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

With game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At game setting value 5, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

At game setting value 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot are common in jackpot drawings between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that are a jackpot are not common. It will be done. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Although six low probability mode win/lose tables and six high probability mode win/lose tables are provided corresponding to the six game setting values, it is sufficient if there is at least one win/lose table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode win/lose tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and it will be a 16R variable jackpot. The number of fourth random numbers that result in a jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that normally result in a jackpot in 5R is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b), the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and electric accessory 315b). Compared to the low frequency support mode (in which the probability of opening the object 315b is low), the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, individual winnings are made for each of the first winning hole 314, which becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning hole 315, which becomes an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game upon winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for games. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, and the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure jackpot", a "16R sure jackpot", a "5R normal jackpot", or a "miss".

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the game is in a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and in a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times, have been notified to the player, or ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game during the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, as another embodiment, a lottery for falling from the probability variable game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state can be considered in variable play. Note that if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, there is no transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described as having three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, the invention is not limited to this, and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round regular jackpot, and a 16R regular jackpot, may also be considered.

The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in variable play in which a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, or a 5R regular jackpot is won, that is, in variable play that transitions to an open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, reach refers to a state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur between the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the stop display of the symbols. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a state of fluctuation. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

The electric reel opening counter C4 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The electric reel opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric reel holding area 412c in the RAM 412 when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric reel 315b will be opened for a predetermined time, based on the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 stored in the electric reel holding area 412c. For example, a win is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and a loss is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the pattern variation display displayed on the pattern display unit 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the rough variation game presentation type such as high-speed variation presentation (basic presentation, non-reach presentation), normal reach presentation, super reach presentation, and special reach presentation according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern by referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a special jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table that are pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, the special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, and a loss variation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, and the loss variation table, the variation pattern is set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. are associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R regular jackpot", the MPU 41 uses a regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", a probability variable jackpot variation table, lottery. If the result is "missing", refer to each missing variation table and identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. One of them is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 selects the normal reach performance pattern. is executed. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the normal reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 displays the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the special reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341. The production pattern is executed. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the special reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the deviation variation table, a variation type counter CS1 is set for each stop type at the time of deviation (front/back deviation reach, reach other than front/back deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence relationship between and the fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front/back off reach or front/back off reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of failure is complete failure, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, when the variation pattern "04" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed. In addition, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "04", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol without a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol accompanied by a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, when the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05" is executed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach presentations with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach presentations executed in the normal reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach presentations selected from among them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than in the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach performance executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern "03", and it is possible to select from among them. One of the specified special reach effects will be executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the performance patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns include an operation performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, for example, a single-shot operation performance in which a single operation is reflected in the performance, and a performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance. It may include operation performances in which the player participates, such as a continuous-hit operation performance in which a repeated-hit operation is reflected in the performance, and a long-press operation performance in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Also, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 16R guaranteed jackpot. If the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "05," indicating that it is a miss. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and performance type, displayed on the pattern display unit 341, based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, plays a sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", "number of balls paid out from the second winning port", "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port", "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and "number of consecutive misses". Of this game information, "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lotteries" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball output performance.

“Number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the general winning hole 313 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is set by the prize ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the general winning opening 313 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. .

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play state, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

“Variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings in the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout ball number" is the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning opening 316 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of paid balls due to the current winning. .

The "setting value" is used to select the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (hit/miss determination). In other words, the "setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low probability mode hit/miss tables (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode hit/miss tables (see FIG. 14(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared as described below. The "setting value" is updated during the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described below.

"Base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. ” is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out of the “general winning hole number of paid out balls” and “first winning hole number of paid out balls”. When the "base" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole") / "number of out balls". The "base information" includes information regarding the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is The 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous game is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412, respectively. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, if the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "number of balls paid out from the general winning opening" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening." Apart from the "Number of balls paid out" and "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning opening", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning opening", and "Number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "second-previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep three or more past 60,000 ball bases as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information relating to the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable feature port to the total number of balls paid out from all the feature ports (general feature port 313, first feature port 314, second feature port 315, and variable feature port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable feature port" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 times) are performed in normal game mode, or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

"Accessory ratio information" is based on the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. , is information regarding the "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole. When the "accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, it is "accessory ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "accessory object ratio information" is stored as the cumulative accessory ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may also be a ratio of accessories to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot drawings" refers to the number of jackpot drawings held in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the game hall opened for business until now. It is the number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is the cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is executed in response to a winning in the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of unit jackpot drawings" is the number of jackpot drawings triggered by a winning of a certain number of minus difference balls in the first prize opening 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main (number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display section of the display section 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting "the number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" from the "number of out balls". In other words, when receiving 250 balls for 1,000 yen at a game hall, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 for an average of 1,000 yen (jackpot lottery number). number of times received). Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" may be the number of jackpot drawings for a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot drawings" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings and the number of unit jackpot drawings in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information as the "number of unit jackpot drawings."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the jackpot lottery result was a jackpot after the game machine 10 was activated before the gaming hall started operating until now. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Furthermore, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively unsuccessful in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, it is 0 times. cleared. The "number of consecutive misses" indicates the result of the validity determination based on the low probability mode validity table in step S1603 when starting the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. If it is a miss, it is added by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers "0" to "9" and alphabets "A" to "F". In addition, in the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and the number "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is also possible to light up dots to clearly indicate the alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, among the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation. Displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which base values (%) calculated by the MPU 41 are displayed. For example, in a case where the current base BL is 31%, "BL", which is an abbreviation for the current base BL, is "8." and "L" on the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432, which are identification segments. The base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 is used to turn on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) at once when pressed, and is located in an easily operable position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. (See Figure 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, allowing the performance display monitor 43 to display base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the power to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided at a location other than the main controller 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 yen is displayed as "base information". The sequence loops from ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(C) shows that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in , it shows that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the time before last was 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program to calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program to display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display section 45 is used to select the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned setting values, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display section 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and may be configured using the performance display monitor 43. The setting value may also be displayed.

The set value change operation unit 46 turns on and off the power of the 7-segment display by pressing it down, and allows the set value to be changed by rotating the 7-segment display while the power is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch whose contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is decreased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and the power supply of the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power supply was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

Note that the method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation section 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. For example, the setting value can be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. A method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc. and rotating the key. It is also possible to change the number displayed on the section 45 and then remove the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a state in which it is visible from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen unless the game board 31 is opened, and the player is prevented from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to ball jamming on the gaming machine 10 or the like.

On the other hand, when the set value display section 45 is in the off state, when the set value change operation section 46 is pressed, the set value display section 45 is turned on, and the numbers corresponding to the set values are hidden. Therefore, when the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value change operation section 46 is pressed during non-business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 is turned on. The set value can be checked based on the numbers displayed on the set value display section 45, and furthermore, the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation section 46. This makes it possible to change the setting values outside of business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting values during business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, playback audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game performance and a jackpot game performance that will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display change pattern command, etc. to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment can also be a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Another embodiment can also be a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device that has the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 based on the command input from the main control device 4. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display section 39, etc. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out A state in which the game balls (balls) are retained and a state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the seven segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control audio output effects, lamp effects based on the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands input from the main controller 4 such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 creates a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(A)) based on the variation pattern command. (B))) and the production pattern type (see FIGS. 39(A) to 37(C)), and sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37(A) to 37(C)). (see step S2105 in the command determination process), the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variable pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. inputted from the audio lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the variable symbol display of the symbol display section 341, as well as images such as preview effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. ing. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, when a dispensing error such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132 occurs to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The ball rental device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores data in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium containing an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the firing control IC 81 determines that, based on the voltage value input in accordance with the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the greater the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents the launch handle 22 from being fixed in a rotating state, for example, and prevents the player from playing in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. Also, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects the entrance of a game ball into any of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. When the out ball sensor 318a detects an out ball, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. When the special out ball sensor 384 detects a special out ball, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start-up winning process associated with a winning to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

On the other hand, the firing control process is performed on the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process that enables the firing of . In addition, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 in an electric role open state based on the ordinary winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute through-gate processing to be performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the current gaming mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. When the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. I judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249. I judge that there is. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is kept open for a predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to win a prize in the second prize opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to Fig. 21.

<Step S1101>
21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the first winning port 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a prize has not been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the validity information before the validity information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determination of the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a first pending command setting process is executed to set the first pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in Fig. 20. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 before the winning/losing information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a second reserved command setting process to set a second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first reserved command" with the "second reserved command" and the "reserved number N" with the "reserved number M" in the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 22.

[First Pending Command Setting Process]
Here, Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first reserved command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 21. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserved command, and information such as the type of the first reserved command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved commands N. Hereinafter, the first reserved command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, and if the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode in a game state change process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when the mode is changed from the high probability mode to another game state such as a big win game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. Based on this, a determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(A)) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and selects the low probability mode. Based on the win/fail table, a win/fail determination is performed to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read out, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the win/fail information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type included in the win/fail information stored in the third holding area REA3 The counter value of counter CS1 is read. It should be noted that among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the win/fail information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21 is based on the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. It can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the pending number N to the first pending command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to on in the first hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp contents similar to the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodic processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot drawing number update command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the variable winning hole 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a winning occurs in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the MPU 41 stores the winning information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The number of balls paid out from the general winning hole or the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. In addition, in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when a winning occurs in the second winning hole 315, the MPU 41 stores the RAM 412 The number of balls paid out from the second winning hole stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, when a winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command necessary for the symbol display unit 341 to display a variable pattern is set. be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in step S1302 and step S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, control processing for a jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 in a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting an ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a sure-variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc., when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state after the variable game that notifies the result of the lottery ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Also, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a variable jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lotteries has finished during the time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

In addition, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state, it sets the flag for the game state before the transition to off, while setting the flag for the game state after the transition to on. For example, when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to off, while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from a high probability game state to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to off, while setting the jackpot game flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value changing process, a process is executed that controls displaying or non-displaying of setting values or changing setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with the operation on the setting value changing operation section 46. Note that details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it may be executed only during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the period from the start-up process until the launch of game balls begins. This prevents the setting value from being changed after the player has started playing until the next time the power is turned on, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information from among game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit big win lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process is executed for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process from S1301 onwards. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of Fig. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Fig. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 judges whether the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game or not, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated, and if it is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being executed is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 23.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern change is being displayed, and if the pattern change is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the pattern change is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the pattern change is being displayed is judged based on a change display flag that is set to ON at the start of the change display in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, and is set to OFF in step S1405 of the change game control process when the change display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display, and if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process moves to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not both the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are 0 (step S1406). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), it ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either one of the reserved number N and the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the validity information data stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process moves to step S1408. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the win/fail information, and ends the variable game control process. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting process]
Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in Fig. 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1501>
25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA (step S1502), and transfers the data from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE. The validity information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is performed when both or either of the reserved number M and the reserved number N is not 0 in step S1406 of Fig. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the reserved number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the winning/losing information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved patterns displayed on the pattern display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in Fig. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, is set to on, for example. . If the gaming state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1602, and if the gaming state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low probability mode. If there is, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 selects the pending storage area 412b based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending storage area It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE of 412b, is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game in the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 creates a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Identify. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). . Furthermore, when the result of the validity determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a failure, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the failure fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5, and the audio lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The unit 341 executes symbol variation display and the like.

As described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "A01" to "A03" obtained by adding "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. When the lottery result is a "5R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "B01" to "B03" obtained by adding "B" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R sure-change jackpot. When the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "C01" to "C03" obtained by adding "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R sure-change jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "08" with the letter "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command as to whether the result is a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variable start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it sets a variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referenced in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether the main display unit 36 is displaying a variable pattern. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "accumulated number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "consecutive number of misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and when the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "consecutive number of misses" to 0.

[Setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process moves to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state is judged based on a jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If the symbol fluctuation display is not in progress or the jackpot game state is not in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display section 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting It is determined whether or not the value change operation section 46 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display section 45. That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot game is in the state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1704, and the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on. If not (step S1703: No), the process moves to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag, which indicates that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, to on (step S1706), and ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), i.e., if the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power supply is not turned on, the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation section 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation to change the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and when the set value change operation section 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation, and vice versa. When the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is displayed.

Note that if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 will not be displayed. If the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 before rotation is "1" and the setting value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the setting value is changed to "1". The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". In addition, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" In addition, it may be possible to prevent further rotation to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 as a setting value over the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation section 46 is switched from on to off, the setting values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the gaming information of the RAM 412 as valid setting values. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 by rotating the setting value change operation section 46, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the set value can be determined by turning off the power of the set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display section 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not an operation to turn off the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the set value change operation unit 46. If the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. Note that if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power supply to the seven-segment display is cut off in the set value display unit 45, so that the numbers indicating the set value are turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off, and ends the setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is selected. In other words, since the low probability mode validity table and the high probability mode validity table have the same set values, it is easy to change the set values. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, the setting values at different stages (numerical values) for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, the setting value for the low probability mode is "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode is "6". It becomes possible to do so.

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of Fig. 23. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the read out number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S1805, and when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the process moves to step S1805. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls does not reach 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning port + number of balls paid out from the first winning port) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(A) and FIG. 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls from the general winning port, the number of payout balls from the first winning port, and the number of out balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update process. The specific performances in this case are, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws, the consecutive role ratio, the role ratio, etc.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of Fig. 23. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL displaying flag is set to on. Here, the BL displaying flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to on in step S1906 or step S1930 in FIG. 33, which will be described later. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), the process moves to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31, which will be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), the process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 before last, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 displaying flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process moves to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 in Fig. 30 (step S1908), and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to OFF (step S1910), and saves the base value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the previous 60,000 balls are displayed. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and End display control processing.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process moves to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby displaying the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Fig. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 in Fig. 31 (step S1917), and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to OFF (step S1919), and displays the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and if the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the day before last (step S1922). , the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1923: Yes). S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Fig. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of Fig. 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process moves to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing when starting up the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of a power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs display order setting process (step S2000), counter update process (step S2001), command determination process (step S2002), and variable game presentation process (step S2003). , a jackpot game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display sequence setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 determines and stores (sets) the sequence of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, with reference to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the setting value suggestion process is executed in the big win game in the predetermined period, so that five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value are displayed in a predetermined sequence on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, in the display sequence setting process, the sequence of displaying the five numbers specifying the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display sequence setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display sequence determination table referred to in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35. Details of the display sequence setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to on (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that setting of the display order of numbers that specify non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. . Further, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by being permitted by the start-up process of the audio lamp control device, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016, which will be described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the seven segment display section 39 during a predetermined period is set.

By the way, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and preventing the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being displayed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming monotonous.

If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The setting value change flag is a flag indicating that the game setting value (setting value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in the command determination process of FIG. 37, which will be described later. It is set to on in step S2121. If the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag off (step S2013), and then moves the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when a set value is changed, the order of numbers to be displayed is set by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. By setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when a setting value is changed in this way, it becomes possible to determine the display order of numbers according to the setting value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512, and further sets the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by referring to the set value and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36). Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the 7-segment display section 39. It is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with the display order of numbers in .

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display sequence determination table, the display sequence of numbers is determined by a random number value selected for each game setting value 1 to 6 (setting value 1 to 6) that is set to determine the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 random numbers selected from 0 to 119, and one display sequence is associated with each random number value, and the selection probability of each display sequence is the same. The display sequences include display sequences A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display sequences B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display sequences C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, display sequences D1 to D120 selected for setting value 4, display sequences E1 to E120 selected for setting value 5, and display sequences F1 to F120 selected for setting value 6, and 120 display sequences corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-setting values are set for each setting value 1 to 6.

The display sequence A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 specifies the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 are displayed (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the setting value is 1 and one of the display sequences A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when setting value 2 is set is the setting values ``1'' and ``3'' to ``6'' other than the number ``2'' that specifies setting value 2. Specifying setting values 2 to 6. The order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number, the number "2" that specifies that the setting value is 2 will be displayed in 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display section 39.

The display sequences C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1," "2," and "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed, other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" that specifies the setting value 3 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences D1 to D120 selected when the setting value is 4 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed, other than the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display order E1 to E120 selected when the setting value is 5 is the five digits “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5. , "6" is displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" that specifies that the set value is 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display sequences F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "5" specifying the set values 1 to 5 are displayed, other than the number "6" specifying the set value 6 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" specifying the set value 6 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

When the order of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 has been set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016) and ends the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the order of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that are set to determine the probability of a jackpot on the gaming machine 10.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the setting value. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a specified order for a specified period when a specified condition (e.g., power is turned on or the setting is changed). In gaming halls, the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before opening, so the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In the display sequence setting process of this embodiment, the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when the setting value is changed, but the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment described later, and examples of the predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the start of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game. Even when the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), for the same setting value, the probability that all number display orders are selected is the same, but the probability that a number display order is selected is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability that at least some number display orders are selected is different from other number display orders for the same setting value. That is, it is conceivable to make it easier to select a specific display order and, conversely, to make it harder to select a specific display order. In this way, if the probability of at least some number display orders being selected according to the setting value is set to be different from other number display orders, it becomes easier for a particular number display order to be selected according to the setting value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult for a particular number display order to be selected. That is, unlike the case where the display order of all numbers has the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It will also be possible to do so. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, setting value 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to high setting values (for example, setting value 5 or more) is delayed. You may also do so. In this case, by leaving until the end the possibility that the setting value is high when the setting value is low, the player is given a sense of expectation that the setting value is high, while at the same time it is possible that the setting value is low. Early identification by the player is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely while suppressing a decline in interest in the game, and to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the setting value is a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-setting value corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) is delayed. It's okay. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high setting value and the numbers corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until immediately before it is determined that the setting value is the high setting value, and the player The possibility that the setting value is low remains until just before it is known that the setting value is high. This allows players to focus on whether the set value is high, which is advantageous to the player, or low, which is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the set value is high. . Furthermore, regardless of the set value, it is also possible to make the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-set values not late, for example, the display order that is the slowest, is more likely to be selected. In this case, the number that indicates the non-set value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the number that indicates the non-set value that is the most disadvantageous to the player, and the non-set value that is more disadvantageous to the player There remains the possibility of a non-set value that is advantageous to . This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and It is possible to suppress the decline in machine operating rate.

It is also possible to set the number display order so that numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later in the number display order. For example, it is possible to set a number display order so that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later in the number display order. Even in this case, until the player grasps the setting value, there is a possibility that the setting value is a high setting value that is advantageous to the player, and a possibility that the setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, so the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether the setting value is a high setting value or a low setting value until the player grasps the setting value.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value is 6), the number display order is set so that it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value are displayed later. It is possible that For example, setting a high selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values that are higher than the set value, players are made to expect that the set value may be higher than the actual set value immediately before they grasp the set value. Can be done. This allows the user to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before the set value is known. On the contrary, unless the setting value is the lowest setting value (setting value is 1), it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values lower than the setting value are displayed later. It is possible to set it as follows. For example, setting a higher selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a lower probability of favorable determination than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with higher probability of favorable determination than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game setting values lower than the set value will be displayed immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a displayed number. As a result, the final candidates for the set value are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, in the end, the game setting value that is more advantageous to the player is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

It is also conceivable to set the number display order so that, regardless of the setting value, the number display order is made later in the sequence of numbers corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting value 5 or higher). Conversely, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order is made earlier in the sequence of numbers corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting value 2 or lower) is made earlier. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later, higher setting values are displayed later. This makes it possible to make the player expect that the setting value is likely to be advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the setting value, and thus allows the player to enjoy guessing non-setting values (setting values) while hoping that the setting value may be high.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, production pattern type counter, variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the production type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the process moves to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and becomes the target of processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area. be remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2103, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbols and the presentation type (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the variation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the presentation type table (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the presentation type counter stored in the RAM 512. Also, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, sets the 5R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, and sets the 16R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The performance type table includes a normal reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see Figure 39 (A)), a super reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see Figure 39 (B)), and a table corresponding to special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination "777" indicates that "333" is a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot). ” is a symbol combination that indicates a 16R probability-variable jackpot, and a double number other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability-variable jackpot, or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. It is a premise.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is selected from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined from decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R special jackpot will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination indicating a 5R special jackpot may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," if a decorative symbol other than "3" and not "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability jackpot promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot.

In addition, when the lottery result is "16-probable jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot," the pattern combinations other than the "777" symbol combination, which indicate a 5R chance-change jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, are stopped and displayed. can be done. When the lottery result is a ``16R probability variable jackpot'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion performance that clearly indicates a 16R probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game.

When the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that will be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the relevant game round is determined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a "miss", all of the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss", it determines the second stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (Fig. 14 (D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front/rear miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front/rear miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol and the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop pattern is determined to be a pattern different from the first stop pattern, and the final stop pattern is determined regardless of the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern. The stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop pattern may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop pattern and the final stop pattern may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are determined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach presentation pattern". Also, the variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result is "5R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach presentation pattern", and the variation pattern command "C03" in which the lottery result is "16R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90 s" and the variation type "special reach presentation pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with a variation display time of "7 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern," and the variation pattern command "D05" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table. The presentation pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 39(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 39(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 39, the performance type table for when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). ``Rendering pattern X1'' to ``Rendering pattern X5'' are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the decorative symbol changes at high speed is executed. , the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. Note that the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a special reach performance pattern type from the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal reach performance and super reach performance are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, normal reach performance and super reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a special reach performance that has higher expectations for a jackpot than a reach performance, and has a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the special reach performance pattern type selection table includes special reach performance patterns that develop into special reach performance after the end of high-speed fluctuation performance or normal reach performance without going through at least one of normal reach performance and super reach performance. You can stay there.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table, and the performance type counter, and the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and determines the command. Finish the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (performance pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to stop varying in sequence. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (performance pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

When the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable play performance flag to ON. This variable play performance flag is a flag that indicates that a variable play performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of a jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game presentation determination process is a process for determining presentations to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening presentation, an ending presentation, and an opening/closing execution mode presentation to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The big win game presentation start flag is a flag for starting a big win game presentation (opening presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening presentation start process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is started in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310), and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the big win game control process in step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). , the process moves to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Furthermore, the ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. Ru.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation end flag to ON and ends the command judgment process. The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The big win game presentation end flag is also referred to when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segments in the 7 segment display unit 39 in step S2301 in the 7 segment display unit control process of Fig. 41.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of Fig. 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command judgment process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 of the display sequence setting process in FIG. 35 and is referenced to determine the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, in the variable game presentation process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the command determination process of FIG. A variable game performance according to the performance pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the big win game presentation process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process, the opening presentation, the ending presentation, and the opening/closing execution mode presentation determined in the big win game presentation determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of Fig. 37 are executed. In the ending presentation, in this embodiment, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Fig. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 is controlled. be done. Further, in the setting value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the jackpot game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set on. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206. to move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending performance start timing. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets a stopper portion lowering flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is lowering to ON (step S2203). The stopper portion lowering flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a lowering time counter corresponding to the time required to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S2205), thereby terminating the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the stopper unit lowering flag, which is set ON in step S2203, is set ON (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is a timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, when the stopper unit lowering flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207, and when the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper is moving down (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. (Step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process shown in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to return the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 located at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined based on whether or not a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, i.e., whether or not the special out ball detection flag has been off for a certain number of times in succession. If the condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is that a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are a large number of special out balls, the special out balls can be counted accurately.

If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212. If the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2203. The set stopper-moving-down flag is set to OFF (step S2213). Thereby, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39. That is, for each big win game, at the ending of the big win game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device during the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game. Details of the seven-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. This ending addition image control process makes it possible to check the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 as well. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper lowering flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game production end flag is set on (step S2216). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the jackpot game performance (ending performance) based on the jackpot game performance end flag. Here, if the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2217, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 sets the relevant setting. Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, when the jackpot game presentation ends, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. Therefore, the player can obtain information for identifying or guessing the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is played. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value each time the jackpot game is played, and therefore the player can enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information for identifying or guessing the non-set value for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of consecutive jackpot games increases, it becomes possible to grasp all (five) non-set values, and in that case, it becomes possible to grasp the set values. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the identified non-set value, and therefore it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, which increases the interest in the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion performance.

[7-segment display control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter that is added and stored in the RAM 512 in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. (Step S2301), and it is determined whether the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or more (Step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the croon device 37 in the jackpot opening/closing execution mode. Then, if the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No), since there is no need to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, the 7-segment display section control process ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads out the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display control information read out from the 7-segment display control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control contents (step S2305). Details of the determination and control of the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display unit control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and an already displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). This area stores the order of numbers to be displayed and the order of control objects of segments A to G when displaying each number. This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

The number display order storage area is stored in the 7-segment display unit 39 and 7-segment display area until the end of a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The order of numbers to be displayed (number display order) is memorized. The number display order is determined by the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) that is set for the setting value that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Determined in. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. As the display order of numbers on the segment display section 39, "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" is stored. In other words, unless the settings are changed while the gaming hall is open, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period during the same business day. . In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display section 39 every time the predetermined period starts. Numbers that are early in the numerical display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the numerical display order are difficult to be displayed. For example, if the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so "2" and "3" are likely to be displayed. On the other hand, "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to estimate and specify the setting value, while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows the user to enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. In addition, because the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers that are early in the display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the display order are difficult to display.For example, when the setting value is set to low, (When the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting is low due to a small number of initial hits. This prevents a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 in progress, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the more specific periods in a given period (the more consecutive jackpots), the more numbers are expected to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more information can be obtained to identify non-set values, and the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, by having 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a given period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, the set value can be recognized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all non-set values, that is, to recognize the set value, and can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots will continue (whether the jackpot type is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot), which increases the interest of the game.

Note that the number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the one set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the settings are changed, but also when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode, etc. may be determined. In this way, when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, the number display order is determined, so that the number display order is determined every predetermined period, for example. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the order in which the numbers are displayed, so that variations in the order of numbers corresponding to non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player can check the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past in order to identify all non-set values and recognize the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to see numbers that are not available.

Meanwhile, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when displaying numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as follows: segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the settings are changed, or a jackpot is won, but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to grasp the number that is scheduled to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of segments A to G, which increases the fun of the game.

It should be noted that, like the numerical display order, the segment control order is fixed within the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when setting values are changed, but it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to make it so that In this case, compared to a case where the segment control order is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so for example when the set value is a low setting (when the jackpot probability is low in low probability mode) , it is possible to prevent the player from early recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending the game he is playing on the gaming machine 10.

The segment control order may also be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode starts (when a specified period starts), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already-displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about numbers that have already been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, numbers that are in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been targeted for control. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already displayed number flag information is information regarding a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The numeral 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in section 39. The number 3 display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. This number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7 segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 6 is not displayed in section 39.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39.

The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. This already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-targeted flag, a segment C already-targeted flag, a segment D already-targeted flag, a segment E already-targeted flag, a segment F already-targeted flag, and a segment G already-targeted flag. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment A of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment A already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment B of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment B already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment B is set to off, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment C already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment C has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment C is set to off, it indicates that the segment C is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment D already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment D is set to off, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment E already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment E is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment F of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment F already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment F is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment G already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment G is not a control target.

In the initial state, all flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already targeted segment flag information are set to off in the already displayed information storage area. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside the specified period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in low probability mode (the start of a specified period in which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated). In this embodiment, all flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 described later when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), that is, when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the specified period is set.

Here, FIGS. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 of the 7-segment display section control information storage area and an example of updating the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an example of updating the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the seven-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the seven-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the seven-segment display 39 is controlled at the ending of the big win game according to the control content (step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 373 (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the ball). For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, the 7 segments A to G on the 7 segment display section 39 Some of the segments are subject to lighting/extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period is 5), then the value of the control order storage area is When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to off), the 7-segment display section 39 The five segments A to E are to be controlled for turning on and off. When the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, Segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, from the all-out state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G shown in FIG. 43(A) are turned off, to the segment A, segment B, and segment shown in FIG. D and segment E are changed to a partially controlled state where they are lit.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects. Furthermore, when turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects, the segments A through E that are the controlled objects may be made to flash, for example, to clearly indicate that they are the controlled objects. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate which segments are the controlled objects.

On the other hand, when the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF to the contents shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E out of segments A to G are controlled, and segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed, all flags including the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, the number 3 already-displayed flag, the number 4 already-displayed flag, the number 5 already-displayed flag, and the number 6 already-displayed flag are maintained as OFF. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2, for which the five segments A to E are the control targets, is set to on. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, and segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to on.

Also, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the seven-segment display control process in FIG. 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) exceeds seven, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 10), a total of ten segments A to G are subject to control on the seven-segment display unit 39. In other words, the seven (all) segments A to G are subject to control to be turned on and off on the seven-segment display unit 39, so that the first display order number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and further, three segments A to C are subject to control to be turned on and off for the second display order number. Specifically, when the contents of the control sequence storage area are as shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state as shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the number 2 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, the seven-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state in which segments A, B, D, E, and G are turned on and segments C and F are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(B) and the seven-segment display unit 39 displays the number 2, and further changes from the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second number to be displayed is 3, so segments A to C are turned on.

Note that the change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial state shown in FIG. 44(C) The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed in stages by sequentially turning on or off segments A to G or segments A to C. Furthermore, when segments A to G or segments A to C are turned on or off in sequence, the segment being controlled may be made to blink to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily need to be clearly specified.

Furthermore, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44(C). In this case, the displayed information storage area changes from the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) in which all flags are set to OFF, through the contents shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B), and finally to the state shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), with respect to the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to E of segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 has ended, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), the number 2 already displayed flag is set to ON, and in the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF, while the currently displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. Thereafter, in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to OFF. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the displayed segment flag information, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, and segment C already targeted flag for segments A to C are set to ON. In other words, every time all the target flags in the displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time seven segments A to G are set as control targets), they become display targets in the displayed number flag information. The already displayed flag for the number is set to on, and the display target flag for the number that was to be displayed in the currently displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is turned on. Set.

As described above, by controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is All or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed. This allows the player to specify or infer the non-set value based on the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, it becomes possible to recognize the set value.

Incidentally, some gaming machines, like gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, have multiple setting values with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the setting value can be selected by the gaming hall. In this case, the gaming hall will want to set the setting value low in order to lower the expected value of balls dispensed. And when the setting value is set low, there is a tendency to prefer a gaming machine whose setting value is not known to players, in order to avoid players quitting play because they realize that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players want gaming machines with set values to allow them to guess (narrow down to multiple set values) or recognize the set values, so that they can play on gaming machines 10 with a higher expected value for ball payout. In this way, gaming parlors and players tend to have conflicting expectations regarding gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate game set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316, the special The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball opening 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. Then, after a specific period has elapsed, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 is counted, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are set as control targets according to the counted number. do. That is, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the game is transferred to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor lit up. Therefore, unless the game is shifted to a jackpot game, the set value will not be estimated or recognized.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and for example, 1 to 2 balls (approximately 1 ball per 10R round game) per 16R jackpot game. It is expected that 99 game balls will land. Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value using the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, the 7-segment display section 39 shows that after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot starts, the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending). During the predetermined period until the start of the game, control is performed according to the cumulative total of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. In other words, if the first hit is a variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, and the opening/closing of the normal jackpot game when winning the normal jackpot will not end. Continues until the mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, although it has a game feature in which it is not easy to recognize the non-set value or even the set value, the longer the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, the more the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 When many game balls 99 are expected to enter the ball, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 in a predetermined period. Non-set values (set values) can be reliably identified. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has information that allows the setting value to be inferred according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is low in a single jackpot, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive jackpots, if the number of consecutive hits is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value), but as the number of consecutive hits increases, the game ball to the special out ball opening 373 Since the expected value of the number of balls entering 99 becomes high, the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced, providing a gaming experience. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be estimated by specifying or estimating some or all of the plurality of non-setting values by stacking all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. be. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), the non-setting value (setting value) can be set more accurately according to the wish of the store side by winning consecutive jackpots. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the player's wishes. Thereby, a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

In conventional slot machines, images suggesting or indicating the set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which game performance is performed. Images suggesting or indicating the set value are displayed, for example, on a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as an ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate the set value, a screen that suggests or indicates, with a certain probability, that the set value is equal to or higher than a specific set value (for example, equal to or higher than an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6)), that the set value is high (for example, set value 5 or 6), that the set value is odd (for example, set value 1, 3, or 5), that the set value is even (for example, set value 2, 4, or 6), that the set value is not a specific set value (for example, the negation of set value 1), that the set value is the highest set value (for example, set value 6), etc. are presented.

However, in the case of suggesting or indicating a setting value in a conventional slot machine, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a setting value is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or indicates a setting value is set low, so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player, or indicating that a specific setting value is set low. In addition, the reliability of suggesting an odd setting value or an even setting value tends to be low, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, in a slot machine, even if a high setting value is suggested or indicated, there is no suggestion or indication that denies a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and in particular no suggestion or indication that denies the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, in a slot machine, information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denial of a high setting value, is not presented.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the setting is made according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Information whose value can be estimated (non-set value) is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display section 39. In other words, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, so the set value can be estimated, and all of the non-set values Since all non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, it becomes possible to identify the set values.

In this way, in this embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is fundamentally different from the suggestion or explicit setting value in a fixed ratio, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. The setting value can be recognized by identifying multiple non-setting values based on the following. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. This point also differs from conventional gaming machines in which setting values are suggested or specified at a fixed rate. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the number of successive jackpots increases, the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases compared to conventional gaming machines such as slot machines. It is different from the suggestion or explicit setting value of

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during jackpot play in a specified period of time. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for identifying the set value is presented does not decrease. Instead, as long as the specified period continues (as long as consecutive jackpots continue), the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues, making it even more fun to guess the set value, and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all non-set values can be identified. In other words, regardless of the high or low non-set values, all non-set values, including information disadvantageous to the player, are presented to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where a set value is suggested or clearly indicated in a conventional slot machine, even information disadvantageous to the player is presented so as to deny the highest set value, etc. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for identifying or guessing the set value, and can determine whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) is delayed is set so that it is easy to select. Conversely, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) is early is set so that it is easy to select. In this way, the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value is early and the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value is late, so that a higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to anticipate the possibility that the set value will be a high value that is advantageous to the player until the player is aware of the set value, allowing the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while hoping that the set value may be high.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51, in step S2401, updates various information in the already displayed information storage area that is updated in step S2306 of FIG. The already displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are read out, and based on these information, an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that shows the display content of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that allows the non-setting value to be specified or estimated (Fig. 47 (B1), Fig. 47 (B2), and Fig. 47 (C)). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the additional image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a normal jackpot game. This is an example. Moreover, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are screen examples (setting value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the latter half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of a certain variable jackpot game, as the first half of the ending effect, it is clearly indicated on the symbol display section 341 that the transition to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will occur after the certain variable jackpot game ends. The image will be displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time saving mode) are displayed in the symbol display section 341 as the first half of the ending performance after the end of the normal jackpot game. An image will be displayed to clearly indicate the transition to . In addition, in the first half of the ending performance, in addition to an image that clearly indicates the game mode to which the game mode will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game, an image that clearly shows the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls to be played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending performance of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, It includes five setting value suggestion images imitating a seven-segment display section 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), the 7-segment display section 39 changes as shown in FIG. 47(B1). An additional image including an image simulating the display state in is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) via FIG. 44(B), the display state shown in FIG. 47(B2) An additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. Is displayed. Furthermore, if all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the predetermined period ends, each number will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C). An additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. In this case, it can be specified that the non-set value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during that predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the ending and recognize or guess the set values based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

In addition, whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the ending performance of a jackpot game on the pattern display unit 341 is a design matter, and it is also possible to not display an additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance. In this way, if an additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number that has been displayed in the past during the predetermined period, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and even to guess or recognize the set value. In other words, by not displaying an additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess the non-set value (set value), so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is prevented from being recognized as not being a high set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2305, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 ends the ending additional image control process.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags off) and ends the ending added image control process. That is, if the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or to increase the accuracy of the guess, it is necessary to have more game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, for the game hall, there is an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or guessed. In addition, the set value can be specified or guessed by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the guess of the set value increases with the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (consecutive jackpots), and in some cases, the set value can be recognized, which can give the gaming machine 10 a gaming feature. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

In addition, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will be ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in the high probability mode, the game will not be ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, by setting the predetermined period to the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. This prevents a player who does not know the timing (end of the predetermined period) when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed from ending the game just before the non-set value (set value) becomes specified or guessable, even if the player proceeds with the game and does not know the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or recognized. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play aiming for the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the specified period is the start of the jackpot game triggered by the first jackpot win in the low probability mode, not only is it necessary to win at least one jackpot before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, but even if the specified period has started, the hurdle of being able to specify the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired onto the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be taken until the non-set value (set value) is guessed or specified to some extent. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, it is highly likely that the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of receiving a jackpot draw) has also reached a stage where it is possible to sufficiently judge. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 during play, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, making it possible to decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to continue playing. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to abandon playing.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or guessing non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check the information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy the progress of the game by recognizing or guessing the set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game, but the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be made displayable during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed, it is possible to display the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 by a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it becomes possible to check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39 when they have been forgotten. This makes it possible to identify or guess the non-set value based on the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 during standby or other times will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment below.

In this way, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 or the like in the standby state, it becomes possible to check the past display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 if you have forgotten them. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 or the like in a standby state, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on an empty gaming machine 10. Can be done. In other words, it becomes possible to specify or infer a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, allowing so-called hyena behavior. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the end of the jackpot game where the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, specific information indicating a non-set value including display history in a predetermined period is restricted from being displayed outside the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of identifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. One predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting values, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed as a jackpot. In this case, the non-set value is clearly displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 by displaying numbers or alphabets corresponding to the non-set value, and in the symbol display section 341 to clearly indicate the non-set value. A reach effect may also be executed. As a non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is conceivable to stop displaying a decorative pattern at the solo number corresponding to the non-set value, for example. In this way, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the non-set value is displayed on the symbol display section 341. By executing the non-set value explicit reach performance that clearly indicates the set value, the player can not only check whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game is a jackpot, but also the first special symbol display section 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy a variable game by paying attention to the numbers etc. that are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 363 and paying attention to the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, when a non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative pattern of the number corresponding to the set value, the number will not be aligned as a zero and will be stopped and displayed as a miss. It is also possible. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative pattern can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666", but it cannot be stopped and displayed at "111", and the decorative pattern If is 1, the reach will always be off. In this way, by not displaying the zero of the number corresponding to the set value, it is normally desirable for the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed at the solo number. Since it is desirable that the solo eye not be displayed in a stopped state, it becomes possible to enjoy the reach effect from a different perspective than before.

It is also conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value explicit reach effect, can be executed only at specific timing. In this way, by limiting the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to specific timing, or by executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the variable game executed at the specific timing.

The specific timing may be, for example, a timing when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 notify the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in a variable game performed in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, the reserved amount is consumed at high speed by the high frequency support mode, and the player can enjoy a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, which tends to be monotonous. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state or the time-limited game state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). That is, the non-set value may be indicated or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to the guaranteed variable play state, or when a player is stuck in a state where there are many variable play times before a jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or as a relief from being stuck. The predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable play times executed after transitioning to the time-saving play state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving play state (e.g., 90 to 100 times). In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or for a jackpot just before the time-saving play ends.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any desired combination.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within the specific period when a specific condition is satisfied In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set based on the number of non-set values (set values), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. We have explained the case presented in

Now, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period in the jackpot consecutive wins. Therefore, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of a jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, if the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first is not stored or recorded, it becomes difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first. That is, if the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded in the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to accurately memorize or record the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, which may result in the player giving up on identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). This undermines the significance of increasing the interest of the game by being able to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment, and one predetermined period is set based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period. Specific information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is presented only once. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is provided only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period. is presented. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience caused when specific information is presented multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once after the end of one predetermined period, so there is no specific information that has been presented in the past during the predetermined period, and the player There is no specific information to remember or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on specific information that is presented only once per predetermined period. This eliminates the trouble of having to accurately memorize or record specified information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest will be improved.

In one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the specified period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball mouth of the Kluen device. Also, in one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the specified period) in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. In other words, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending additional image control process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game starts (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 40), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the control of the up and down movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 that receives the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the process of counting the number of game balls 99 that are retained in the game ball retention part 38 during the predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is controlled, and the game ball retention for a predetermined period of time. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the section 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display section control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , based on the stopper lowering flag that is set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2203), and executed on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control processing]
The 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading out the control order and already displayed information (see FIG. 42) of the 7-segment display control information, the 7-segment display control is performed. Only the control order of information is read out (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is activated only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), there is no need to read the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display section 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in Fig. 50, the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 46), but step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is executed in response to a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Fig. 48), the initialization of the already displayed information storage area is executed in step S2405 without even determining that it is a 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information previously presented in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the fun of the game.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first embodiment described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated after a specific period has elapsed (ending of a jackpot game) based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information (numbers) for the 7-segment display section 39 is presented. Further, in the first embodiment described above, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed. (See FIG. 36). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the order in which numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is fixed.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed (see FIG. ), the numbers will be displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the settings are changed. The control order of segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information can be obtained than the specific information already presented, Unable to obtain new specific information. As a result, if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions will be met in a specific period, and the specific conditions to be met. There is concern that interest in specific information presented after a specific period of time may decline.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which the specific information is presented (the order in which the numbers are displayed and the order in which the segments are displayed) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which the specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding given period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a given period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and it is also possible to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) according to the number of specific conditions satisfied.

Note that the predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, starting the opening of a jackpot game, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a jackpot game. is possible. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the presentation order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of specific information in a jackpot game, so it is possible to increase interest in the jackpot game.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a jackpot in a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode). By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the number of times the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information is presented in relation to the specific information presented earlier, it becomes more difficult to identify all non-set values (identify the set values), and it is possible to prevent all non-set values from being identified early (identify the set values). This makes it possible to prevent a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set values are low, for example.

Furthermore, the predetermined condition may include the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information can be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be that a specific presentation is determined or executed as a variable game presentation. In this case, the specific presentation may be set to either a non-reach presentation or a reach presentation. Typically, the specific presentation may be a premium presentation in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed among the variable game presentations. Furthermore, the specific presentation may be a decorative pattern displayed in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341, or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display). For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed as "777" on the pattern display unit 341, or may be displayed as a specific reach-out number such as "767", or may be displayed as a specific non-reach-out number (variable number) such as "367", or may be displayed as a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that a development presentation will be executed when a development presentation such as a super reach presentation or a special reach presentation is executed as a reach presentation. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, a "7 Development 7" is displayed in which the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach state and a symbol such as "Development" is temporarily displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined period or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions may include a single jackpot occurring multiple times in a row, or the same specific information being presented in the same order multiple times in a row. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as specific information. Therefore, it becomes easier to obtain new information as specific information, so it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of specific information determined (changed) may be given priority to the predetermined condition that is met first, or Priority may be given to the presentation order of specific information that is determined (changed) based on a predetermined condition that is satisfied.

In an example of the present embodiment, multiple non-settings are set as specific information on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each value and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders. (after the elapse of time), all or part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. 51. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in Fig. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the jackpot game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game presentation start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game presentation is to be started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. If the jackpot game presentation start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and if the jackpot game presentation start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game presentation start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game presentation is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period is to start. Whether the jackpot is in the low probability mode can be judged by, for example, including probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low probability mode or the high probability mode in the jackpot game start command when the jackpot game is started, and by setting a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low probability mode to on or off based on the probability mode information in the command judgment process of FIG. 37 when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, and by checking the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command separate from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the jackpot is in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that starts a specified period), the MPU 51 transitions to step S2603. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not in low probability mode (step S2602: No), i.e., if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further changes the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display section 39. is determined (step S2604), and the control order of segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

The display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36, similar to step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. The determined number display order is stored in the RAM 512.

Furthermore, the control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders for segments A to G are defined according to the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. The probabilities are set to be the same. Then, the control order of segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders to the same order for each number, depending on the value of the control order type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. Ru. Further, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order for each number may be different. In other words, the control order for segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) are satisfied.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first and second embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed after the specific period has elapsed (ending of the jackpot game). The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined period (after a specific period has elapsed).

However, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the specified period, it is expected that the player will wish to reconfirm the specific information in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by taking into account the specific information displayed in the past. It is also expected that when a player is replaced, the new player will wish to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, if the specific information is presented during the specified period, it is not presented outside the specified period, and so the new player will not be able to reconfirm the specific information.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented during a special period other than the specified period. In this way, by being able to present specific information that was presented in the past during a special period other than the specified period, the player is able to confirm specific information that was presented in the past during the special period. In other words, if a player misses or forgets to present specific information during a specified period, the player can reconfirm the specific information that was displayed in the past, and if the player is replaced, the player can check the specific information displayed after the player is replaced. The player can confirm specific information presented to past players. This allows players to identify or infer multiple non-setting values (setting values) by taking into account specific information presented to past players. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a period of a standby state (customer waiting state) in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is a standby period in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information presented in the past while no game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of various performances executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game performances and jackpot game performances, from being obstructed.

In addition, if it is possible to present all or part of specific information that has been presented in the past during the standby state, predetermined input operations such as password input operations and command input operations may be performed on specific display screens that can be moved to during the standby state. It is also conceivable to make it a condition that the operation be performed. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display section 341 at the end of a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands can be entered externally by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone. It may also be possible to enter through so-called mobile linkage, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information that was presented in the past during the standby state, on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, Only players who can enter passwords, commands, etc., that is, only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, can confirm all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past during the standby period. becomes possible. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and free riding in which all or part of past specific information is confirmed by other players.

In addition, by using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be moved to in the standby state, all or part of the specific information previously presented on the mobile terminal can be read. It is also conceivable to have the information presented.

The special period may also be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the open/close execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during a jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented without the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being clearly indicated or suggested. This makes it possible to prevent the clear indication or suggestion of the result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since a jackpot game is played after the result in the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated as a jackpot through variable play, player interest tends to decrease, but by presenting specific information that was previously presented during such a jackpot game, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

The special period may also be set during variable play. In this case, the total time during which the game is played (the time during which the power is on in the gaming machine 10 minus the time in standby mode) is theoretically longer than the time during which the jackpot variable play is played. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during variable play, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during variable play, it is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state in which a reach presentation is not being performed as a variable play presentation, or when the change time is short. This makes it possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stopped display of the decorative pattern from being hindered.

Furthermore, presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

If the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have the past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with unexpected gameplay. Furthermore, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player performing any operations on the gaming machine 10, even if the player has little knowledge about the gaming machine 10, , it becomes possible to know specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Here, examples of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the execution of a specific reach performance at a certain rate (including 100%) when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, and determining to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery performed at a specific timing of a variable game or a big win game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select a gaming machine 10 for executing a game from vacant machines while taking into consideration the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting a gaming machine 10 for executing a game is improved. Also, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of a specific reach performance when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, the presentation of the past specific information serves as a pre-notification performance for the execution of the specific reach performance, so that the interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable that the presentation of past specific information in variable play can be performed as an expectation suggestion effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the expectation (reliability) in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation (reliability). In this case as well, interest in variable play is increased. Furthermore, when past specific information is presented by a lottery performed at a specific timing in variable play or jackpot play, the past specific information is presented at a specific random timing determined by the gaming machine 10, which can add a special element of surprise to the game. Furthermore, when the player knows the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the presentation of past specific information during a special period is executed at the player's will, the player does not have to passively wait for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, but can actively check the past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference during the special period. Therefore, when multiple non-set values (set values) are identified or inferred in consideration of past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information reflects the player's will without being restricted by the gaming machine 10, improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of past specific information during a special period being executed at the player's will is the presentation of previously presented specific information when a player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the like during a special period set in standby mode, during variable play, or during a jackpot play.

In one example of this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game (prescribed period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the multiple non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed, and during the standby period (special period), by performing a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the end of the last three jackpot games is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Note that in this example of the present embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or command.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, FIG. 53 is an oblique view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that, when pressed by the player in a standby state described below, changes the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen during the standby state screen transition process in Figs. 61 and 62 described below (see Fig. 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d that switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 as shown in Fig. 54. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated, based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and receives operations by the player on the touch keys may be provided as the operation means. Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is also possible to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display section 341 to receive operations from the player. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches, but may also be piezoelectric elements, for example, as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player. .

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above, operation detection processing ( Step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), a decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and a decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first detection flag to the third detection flag as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two states prior is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Figs. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to ON. If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 continues to be operated. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continuing, and therefore, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of the time. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time period during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines that the first operation detection flag is not on in step S3001 (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A judgment is made (step S3005). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is on, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, the operation states of the operation button 20 three times are reflected, so that erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines that the second operation detection flag is not on in step S3002 (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (or whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an upward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a downward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "lower selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. If this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

As shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the decision button 21B. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has started). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON, and the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has ended). .

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed at 2702 of the sub timer interrupt process, in the standby state where neither variable play nor big win play is being executed, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is transitioned in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B, and a process is executed that enables the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the symbol display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the display of the changing decorative symbols is stopped, if the reserved number N and reserved number M are "0" and the game does not transition to a jackpot game state, the change stop screen in which the changing of the decorative symbols has stopped is maintained. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the change stop screen is displayed, the display screen transitions from the change stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a transition destination display screen, and include a plurality of selectable items (transition destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen that displays "7-segment display history", and a character selection screen that displays "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the character selection screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen that displays "Character customization," and a transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen that displays "Back" Contains variable stop screen transition images.

The cursor image is an image indicating which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is an image that indicates which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items. This item is temporarily selected. The example shown in FIG. 60 shows that "7 segment display section history" is temporarily selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize that it has been temporarily selected. . Note that the temporary selection items can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is selected. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and operates the enter button 21B, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. will be moved to

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the contents of specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 for any of the most recent three predetermined periods, and is the previous history screen on which the contents of specific information for the previous predetermined period are displayed. , a 2nd previous history screen where the content of specific information for the 2nd previous predetermined period is displayed, and a 3rd previous history screen where the content of the specific information for the 3rd previous predetermined period is displayed. Each history screen is a history image in the same form as the additional image displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C)). including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and shows five settings imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Contains value-suggesting images. In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in the previous predetermined period, segments A to This indicates that C has a history of being lit.

The 7-segment display history selection screen also includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection, a 1-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 1-back history screen displaying "History 1 (1 back)," a 2-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 2-back history screen displaying "History 2 (2 back)," a 3-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 3-back history screen displaying "History 3 (3 back)," and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to a fluctuation stop screen displaying "End." Then, by operating the decision button 21B on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen) is decided, and a transition is made to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, when the player provisionally selects the 1-back history screen transition image of "History 1 (1 back)," and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1-back history screen. Furthermore, when "History 2 (2 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen. Furthermore, when "End" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to shift from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the desired history information by moving to the desired history screen. This makes it possible to effectively check the history while avoiding checking historical information such as previously confirmed information or information with a small amount of information, so it is possible to efficiently check the history.

Further, in this embodiment, information for specifying a non-set value at the ending of a jackpot game is displayed on a 7-segment display section 39 different from the symbol display section 341 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when displaying information for specifying non-set values, visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on a symbol display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39. Here, since the symbol display section 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display section 341. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display section 341, it becomes possible to check the history information through operations similar to those for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of checking history information is improved.

Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also possible to display a plurality of pieces of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

In addition, when the character screen transition image of "character selection" is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen transitions to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "character customization" is selected, the display screen transitions to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc., of the character.

In addition, in the top menu screen, when the "return" variation stop screen transition image is selected, the display screen is shifted to the variation stop screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 for the most recent three predetermined periods can be checked by operating the selection decision section 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) in the standby state. Can be done. Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) by taking into consideration the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, Fig. 61 and Fig. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55. Below, the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuating game performance flag set to on in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 to OFF (step S3101: No), and executes the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. If the jackpot game performance flag, which is set to ON when transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game performance process in step S2004, is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the standby state I judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in a standby state if the variable game performance flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or if the jackpot game performance flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). I judge that.

If the MPU 51 is in a standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), it transitions to step S3103, and if the MPU 51 is not in a standby state (steps S3101 or S3102 are Yes), it terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 described later when the display screen is shifted from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the variable stop screen is shifted to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in Fig. 62 described later, when the display screen is shifted from the one-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the one-back history screen processing of step S3113, when the display screen is shifted from the two-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the two-back history screen processing of step S3115, and when the display screen is shifted from the three-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-back history screen processing of step S3117. Note that the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the display of the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

Then, if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , the process moves to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to a top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen and the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in Fig. 62, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Fig. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the temporarily selected item is changed in accordance with the operation on the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen processing, when the operation on the enter button 21B is performed, a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character selection screen, is displayed. Shift the display screen to the customization screen. Furthermore, when the display screen is transferred from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is a 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display section history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the first previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the second previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3115 if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: Yes) S3114: No), the process moves to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the second previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6th previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117 if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3116: Yes), and if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the process moves to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7 segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the other screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen shift processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all the screen flags are off, the change is made from the variable gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the waiting state, and the display screen can be determined to be the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, a process is executed to transition the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to a fluctuation stop screen, a one-time history screen, a two-time history screen, or a three-time history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Fig. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second up selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the up selection button 211 has been started, and is set to ON in the up selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing in Fig. 56. If the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and if the second up selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Execute. For example, if "History 2 (2nd time ago)" is temporarily selected before the 2nd upper selection pattern flag is set to on, the temporary selection display changes to "History 1 (1st time ago)". (See Figure 60). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1st previous)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display is not changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation on the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 determines that the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 has started, and is used to detect the lower selection operation performed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to on in pattern determination processing. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3204, and if the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process moves to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the decision button operation detection pattern judgment process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208, and if the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the tentatively selected item is "End" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is a fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “History 1 (1st time)” (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 changes the item that was temporarily selected to “History 2 (2nd time)”. (step S3213). If the temporarily selected item is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3214, and the temporarily selected item is "History 2 (2 times ago)". )" (step S3213: No), the process moves to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2 previous history screen flag to on (step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 times back)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the provisionally selected item is "History 3 (3 times back)", and therefore changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 times back history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), sets the 3 times back history screen flag to on (step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to any of the 1-back history screen, 2-back history screen, and 3-back history screen, and all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 for the past three predetermined periods can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he/she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game, and when the player is replaced, the new player can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, and unless the player performs an intentional screen transition operation, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen). , 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen) to other screens such as the fluctuation stop screen. Therefore, the player stops launching the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of a jackpot game. This allows the user to carefully and carefully take their time and check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past at their own pace. This allows players to think carefully at their own pace when specifying or estimating multiple non-setting values (setting values) based on past specific information. The convenience of specifying or estimating the set value is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is displayed for a predetermined period of three times in the past. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to confirm specific information for a predetermined period of one, two, or four or more past times.

Further, past specific information may be displayed not only by the symbol display section 341 but also by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, or a display section different from the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39, for example, a separate display section provided for displaying the past specific information. It may be a display section. In addition, if there is a display section that is provided to execute a part of a performance such as a variable game performance separately from the symbol display section 341, past information may be displayed on the display section. Conceivable.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after the specific period has elapsed (the ending of the jackpot game), each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is set. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is ended with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, each time the specific period set as a predetermined period passes, the specific information is displayed in the specified period set after the elapse of the specific period.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers (non-set values) to be displayed are setting value) can be specified. Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Further, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become control targets, the next display will not be displayed until after all segments A to G become control targets. Control of segments A to G for displaying the target numbers is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become control targets, the display of the next number to be displayed will start. Until now, information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to identify the numbers that the player has already recognized. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven segment display section 39. There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during a period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set for a jackpot game passes, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game, so it corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values. All or part of the numbers (specific information) to be used are dispensed every time a specific period passes. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed in the specific period that has elapsed earlier, it is possible that the user may forget the number. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or estimate the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a number of information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display unit displays information (numbers) that identifies the non-set value. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighted state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (lighted out state) in which specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. In this way, when the information display unit is in either of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and information that can infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after one specific information that can identify a non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

There are no particular restrictions on the non-set value display means, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display sections, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc. Examples include matrix displays and plasma displays. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is also possible to use a display means in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed, and until the end of the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set, at least for a specific period The information display section that was previously set to the display state is set to the display state. For example, the information display unit that was in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display section that was in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that the But you can check it. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

The information display section that is in a displayed state during a specific period may be kept in a constantly displayed state for the specified period and until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period, or may be kept in a displayed state only during the jackpot game, or may be kept in a displayed state only for the specific period.

In one example of this embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units numbered 1 to 6, by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the special out ball hole of the Kluen device during a specific period, the individual lamp units numbered with a number corresponding to a non-set value are turned on at the point where the lamp lighting lottery is won, without having to wait for the specific period to pass. Then, during the specified period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment. Note that FIGS. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modifications of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off the lamp display section 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A instead of the gaming ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the gaming board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment described above.

The special out ball discharge unit 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration in which the stopper unit 383 is omitted in the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention unit 38 except that the stopper unit 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge unit 38A, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that identifies non-set values, and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (line) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. As can be seen from FIG. 66, this allows the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on and off individually.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1, and when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 1, and game setting value 1 is negated as the set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 2, and game setting value 2 is negated as the set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 3, and game setting value 3 is negated as the set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 4, and game setting value 4 is negated as the set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 5 is negated as the set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value 6 is negated as the set value.

That is, in the lamp display section 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are in the lit state correspond to a plurality of non-setting values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as a setting value. Ru. When the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp section 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The number corresponding to one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356, which is the state, corresponds to the setting value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352-356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 2-6 and the set value is identified as 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353-356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 3-6 and the set value is identified as 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354-356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 2, 4-6 and the set value is identified as 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Hereinafter, the procedure of the set value suggestion process will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Fig. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting an ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for starting an ending performance based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 sets the relevant setting. Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356. That is, every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. This allows the setting values to be recognized. In the 7-segment display section 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control each of the 7 segments A to G 5 times, so the specific condition is set 35 times (7×5 times). ) or more must hold true. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes, the on state and the off state. Therefore, in order to make the lamp display unit 35 display the five non-set values so that the set value can be recognized, it is sufficient that the specific condition is satisfied five or more times. Also, in this embodiment, a crane device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Therefore, if the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the non-set values will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by employing the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty level of lighting up the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. That is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is determined by indicating the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 by displaying five numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. The level of difficulty is set to be the same or approximately the same as the level of difficulty. Furthermore, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or may be the same probability of winning for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit is stabilized, and a game feature is provided in which the probability is stabilized. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 x (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% to 20%). This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, so that in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, if the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery to light one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the multiple non-set values is a lottery condition that is different from the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set according to the difficulty of achieving this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set low, and the higher the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set. In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the difficulty of achieving a specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as a lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, a game in which the probability of individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values being lit varies. gender is given. If the probability of winning for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is set to be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, it is conceivable to set the winning probability to be lower for the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are controlled later in the control order, for example. As an example, the winning probability is set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are controlled earlier.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value process.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the lit lamp information is information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit, and includes lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The lit lamp flag information includes a first lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , a third lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section. It consists of a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned off. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to OFF, and the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 judges whether all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, when all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the setting value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, when there is an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is a lit lamp flag set to OFF in the lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order (lamp control order) of the individual lamps (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control sequence is set by a procedure similar to that of the display sequence setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed, the lamp control sequence is determined by referring to the lamp control sequence determination table based on the setting value stored in RAM 412. This lamp control sequence determination table is similar to the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display sequence determination table can be thought of as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display sequence A1 is determined, the control sequence of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the number display sequence determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display sequence will be selected is the same, and in the lamp control sequence determination table in this embodiment, the probability that each lamp control sequence will be selected is also the same.

Note that the lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when setting values are changed, but it may also be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the lamp control orders do not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the already-lit lamp information is set to all already-lit lamp flags off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. 68(B), if the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit up, the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on as shown in FIG. 68(C).

As described above, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to A non-setting value can be specified by lighting up 356. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. Since the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are in either of the two states, the lit state and the unlit state, non-set values can be identified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are in the lit state. be. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

<Step S3311>
If the ending presentation start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and if the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 if any of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit (step S3313), and further clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off in the case of a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, specific information that specifies a non-set value. As a result, there is no risk of forgetting previously presented specific information during the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 and the player wins the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed as a trigger, the non-set value on the lamp display section 35 corresponds to the non-setting value. The individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned on, but it is optional to perform a lamp lighting lottery, and instead of performing a lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment, a game is placed on the special out ball opening 373. When the ball 99 enters the ball, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values may be turned on. If the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of putting the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the clone device 37 may be increased, or the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 may be transferred to the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 will be lit by sorting the routes into routes detected by and routes not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 that present a non-set value are in one of two states, the lit state and the unlit state, and the individual lamp section 351 in the lit state Information specifying non-setting values is presented according to the type (number) of 356 to 356. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

In addition, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. The lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 remain lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information that identifies the non-set value is checked at any time based on whether or not the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit. be able to. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the degree of difficulty in satisfying a specific condition is adjusted based on the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of lighting up each of the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. , that is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

Note that the light is immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly shown to the player on a display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37); The result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), and the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information regarding the symbol is clearly displayed on the symbol display section 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are lit. An image is displayed to draw attention to the possibility, that is, the lamp display section 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the symbol display section 341, the game ball 99 will be displayed in the special out ball opening 373. Even if you miss that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the symbol display section 341 will show that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 It is possible to know that there is a possibility that the light may be turned on.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that will be turned on is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In the example shown, it is displayed that the second individual lamp unit 352 will be turned on. In this way, by displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to know whether the individual lamp units 351-356 will be turned on not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the pattern display unit 341, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open/close execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit is continuously displayed. That is, the individual lamp sections 351-356 of the individual lamp sections 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display section 341. Note that, for example, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit during the jackpot game (at least during the open/close execution mode) may be displayed until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the specified period is set.

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, an image is displayed indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, while a jackpot game is being played (at least while the open/close execution mode is being played), information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is continuously displayed by the pattern display unit 341, so that the lit individual lamp units 351-356 can be confirmed on the pattern display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35, improving convenience.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display section 341 instead of on the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the symbol display section 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. . For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of a jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display section 35 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an additional ending image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the on/off state of the lamp display section 35 by the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to confirm the on/off state of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that have been lit up to the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 is configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line), but the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other configurations can also be used. For example, it is possible to use a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), or a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B). Furthermore, the lamp display unit 35 may be configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display section 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, a staggered pattern, etc. may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible within an applicable range.

Sixth embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated upon the end of the jackpot game.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, a jackpot lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the lottery result of this jackpot lottery is displayed as a decorative pattern on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. The notification is given by a variable game that is displayed in a variable manner and is displayed in a stopped manner. In the variable game, from the time the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner until the stop table is displayed, a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot is executed on various presentation devices such as a display device. . This variable game performance includes a main performance that is continuously executed from when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner until the stop table is displayed, and various preview performances that are executed during the main performance. The preview performance includes a performance that indicates the level of expectation for a jackpot in the relevant variable game, a performance that clearly indicates or suggests an event that may occur in the future in the relevant variable game, such as a statement or suggestion of the development destination of the performance in the relevant variable game performance. .

The various preview effects are determined separately from the main effect at the start of the variable play. Therefore, the contents indicated or suggested by the various preview effects may overlap. Specifically, for example, the step-up effect may indicate or suggest that the effect will develop into a super effect first, and then the dialogue effect may indicate or suggest that the effect will develop into a super effect. In this case, since the preview effect executed first indicates or suggests that the effect will develop into a super reach effect, even if the later preview effect indicates or suggests that the effect will develop into a super reach effect, the player will not obtain new information from the later preview effect. On the other hand, the player expects to obtain new information from the later preview effect. As a result, if the same contents are indicated or suggested multiple times by the preview effect in one variable play, the player may feel uncomfortable with the later preview effect, which may cause a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when multiple preview performances are executed in one variable play, if a preview performance containing the same content as the preview content for an event that may occur in the future in that variable play (future occurrence event) is executed in those preview performances, the execution of a preview performance executed later is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of a preview performance executed later when a preview performance containing the same content as the preview content for a future occurrence event is executed, the execution of a preview performance with the same preview content in one variable play is suppressed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the preview performance executed later. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by preview performances with the same preview content being executed multiple times.

Note that preview effects include, for example, dialogue effects, step-up effects, mini-character effects, cut-in effects, voice effects, operation button effects, device activation effects, and combination effects of two or more of these effects. Examples of combination effects include step-up effects with dialogue, cut-in effects with dialogue, step-up effects with voice, cut-in effects with voice, dialogue effects resulting from operation of an operation button, step-up effects resulting from operation of an operation button, cut-in effects resulting from operation of an operation button, and device activation effects resulting from operation of an operation button.

In addition, if the execution of a preview performance that will be executed later is restricted, a preview performance that has different preview contents from the previous preview performance will be executed at the execution timing of the later preview performance, provided that a predetermined condition is met (notice It is conceivable that changes in content may be made. In this way, by changing the preview performance of the preview performance that is executed later to a different preview content, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game that would be caused by the same preview content being presented in the preview performance that will be executed later. Not only this, but also the changed preview performance makes it possible to present preview contents different from the previous preview performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, when multiple preview effects containing the same preview content are scheduled to be executed, the predetermined conditions (change conditions) under which the subsequent preview effect is changed to a preview effect with different preview content are: For example, it is conceivable that an unforeseen event will occur in the future at the execution timing of a preview performance that will be executed later. In this way, by changing the preview content of the preview performance that will be executed later when there is an unannounced future event, it is possible to set content related to the unannounced future event as the changed preview content. It becomes possible. In addition, if the preview content is the same, and a later preview effect sets content related to an unannounced future event, the overlap in the preview content, which would normally cause players to feel disgusted, can be reversed. New information is presented to the player in an advantageous situation, further improving the interest of the game.

In addition, future occurrence events, that is, the preview content after the subsequent preview performance is changed, may be related to the performance (lottery result in the jackpot lottery) that will be executed in the progress of the variable game. In this way, if a preview performance that includes the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the preview content after the change in the later preview performance will be the performance that will be executed in the progress of the variable game (in the jackpot lottery). (lottery result), it is possible to know in the later preview performance that the preview content is different from the previous preview performance regarding the performance to be executed later. As a result, the player can determine the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game will be a jackpot based on the performance that is grasped from the preview content of the previous preview performance and the subsequent preview performance (the expectation level of the performance) Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing or recognizing the reliability, the interest in the game is further improved.

In addition, future occurrences related to the effects executed in the progress of the variable play (the lottery results in the jackpot lottery) include, for example, the total number of pseudo-consecutive turns, the number of pseudo-consecutive turns that have not been executed, the occurrence of a reach, the comprehensive type of development after a reach (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a special reach effect), the specific type of development effect after a reach (for example, a specific normal reach effect within a normal reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect type executed in effect pattern X1 (see Figure 39 (A))), a specific super reach effect within a super reach effect (for example, a super reach effect type executed in effect pattern Y1 (see Figure 39 (B))), a specific special reach effect within a special reach effect (for example, a special reach effect type executed in effect pattern Z1 (see Figure 39 (C)))), an indication that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, an indication that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a guaranteed jackpot, a change in the reserved display (a change in the form (for example, color or pattern) of the reserved display, such as an icon indicating the reservation of the right to execute a variable play on a display device such as a pattern display unit), etc. In other words, the preview content after the change of the later preview performance may be related to the performance executed in the progress of the variable game (the lottery result in the jackpot lottery). In this way, when a preview performance including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the preview content after the change of the later preview performance is related to the performance executed in the progress of the variable game (the lottery result in the jackpot lottery), so that the player can learn preview content different from the previous preview performance in the later preview performance regarding the performance to be executed later. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing or recognizing the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game will be a jackpot (the reliability of the performance) based on the performance understood from the preview content of the previous preview performance and the later preview performance, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the preview content after the change in the later preview performance (an unannounced future event) can be another preview content that is pre-classified into the same preview content group as the preview content in the earlier preview performance. That is, when multiple preview performances containing the same preview content are scheduled to be performed and a specified condition is met, the preview content of the later preview performance is changed to a preview content selected from the preview content group containing the same preview content and different from the preview content in the earlier preview performance (overlapping preview content). In this way, when the preview content overlaps, the preview content of the later preview performance is changed to a preview content different from the overlapping preview content from the preview content group containing the overlapping preview content, making it possible to transform the preview content of the later preview performance into various contents depending on how the preview content groups are classified.

Further, it is conceivable that the group of notice contents of the notice contents is divided into groups of notice contents of the same type or type, for example. In other words, if a predetermined condition is met when multiple preview performances containing the same preview content are scheduled to be executed, the preview content in the later preview performance will be the same as the preview content in the previous preview performance. will be changed to another notice of the same type or type. In this way, if multiple preview performances containing the same preview content are scheduled to be executed, the preview content in the later preview performance may be of the same type or different from the preview content in the previous preview performance. By changing the preview content of the same system, two types of information can be obtained regarding future events of the same type or system. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by inferring or recognizing future events (performances) based on different preview contents of the same type or the same type that are grasped from the preview contents of the previous preview performance and the subsequent preview performance. This makes the game even more interesting.

In addition, as the same type or system of notice contents, for example, notice contents that can be classified as a notice performance group due to having a comprehensive identity, commonality, or relatedness are conceivable. Examples of such notice performance groups include notice performance groups that can be grouped together, such as a pseudo consecutive notice performance group related to a pseudo consecutive notice, a development notice performance group related to a development performance, a jackpot confirmation notice performance group related to a jackpot confirmation, and a hold display change notice performance group related to a hold display change. In other words, when a predetermined condition is established when multiple notice performances including the same notice content are scheduled to be executed, the notice content of the later notice performance is changed to a notice content different from the notice content of the earlier notice performance in the notice performance group that includes the notice content of the earlier notice performance (overlapping notice performance). In this way, when multiple notice performances including the same notice content are scheduled to be executed, the notice content of the later notice performance is changed to a notice content different from the notice content of the earlier notice performance in the notice performance group that includes the notice content of the earlier notice performance (overlapping notice performance), so that two types of information can be obtained about future occurrence events that have a comprehensive identity, commonality, or relatedness. This allows players to enjoy the game by guessing or recognizing future events (performances) based on the different preview contents that have a comprehensive identity, commonality, or relevance as understood from the preview contents of the earlier preview performance and the later preview performance, further increasing the interest of the game.

Here, the pseudo consecutive win preview performance group includes, for example, a pseudo consecutive win execution preview that previews the execution of a pseudo consecutive win, an unexecuted pseudo consecutive win count preview performance that previews the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive wins, and a total pseudo consecutive win count preview performance that previews the total number of pseudo consecutive wins. In terms of the amount of information (specificity), the unexecuted pseudo consecutive win count preview performance and the total number of pseudo consecutive wins are greater than the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance, and the former preview performance is also a detailed (concrete) version of the latter preview performance. Therefore, for example, if it is determined that the pseudo consecutive win execution performances will be executed in duplicate and a specified condition is met, after the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance is executed first, the pseudo consecutive win execution preview scheduled to be executed later is changed to the unexecuted pseudo consecutive win count preview performance or the total pseudo consecutive win count preview performance (the preview content is stepped up (upgraded) or detailed (concrete)). This not only prevents players from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding the execution of preview performances with the same preview content, and thus prevents a decline in interest in the game, but also increases the amount of information available to players by providing more detailed preview content, allowing players to enjoy the progress of the game more based on the newly obtained information, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The group of development performance preview performances also includes a comprehensive development performance preview performance that previews a comprehensive type of development performance that will be executed after a high-speed change performance in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed, and a specific development performance preview performance that previews a specific type of development performance that will be executed after a high-speed change performance.

The comprehensive development performance preview performance includes, for example, a normal reach preview performance, a super reach preview performance, and a special reach preview performance. The normal reach performance is a performance that foretells that the normal reach performance will be executed (the reach state will be reached), and can be performed when any of the normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance is performed. The super reach performance is a performance that foretells that the super reach performance will be executed, and can be executed when either the super reach performance or the special reach performance is performed. The special reach preview performance is a performance that foretells that the special reach preview performance will be executed, and can be executed only when the special reach preview performance is executed.

Here, the development effects are normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects, in that order, which are effects with the highest probability of winning (reliability), and the reach effects are stepped up (higher rank, more advantageous) in that order. Therefore, in the comprehensive development effect preview effects, the normal reach preview effects, super reach preview effects, and special reach preview effects are stepped up (higher rank, more advantageous) in the probability of winning (preview effect level) in that order. And, for example, if it is decided that a normal reach preview effect will be executed in duplicate, after the normal reach preview effect is executed first, the normal reach preview effect scheduled to be executed later is changed (stepped up) to a super reach preview effect or a special reach preview effect. In this way, by stepping up the preview performance when a preview performance with the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, not only is the execution of a preview performance with the same preview content avoided, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and thus prevents a decrease in interest in the game, but because the preview content is stepped up, the player is expected to be in a more advantageous state, allowing him or her to enjoy the progress of the game more and increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, a specific development performance preview performance previews a specific type of development performance, for example a type of specific normal reach performance within a normal reach performance (for example a normal reach performance executed in performance patterns X1 to X5 (see Figure 39 (A))), a type of specific super reach performance within a super reach performance (for example a super reach performance executed in performance patterns Y1 to Y5 (see Figure 39 (B))), or a type of specific special reach performance within a special reach performance (for example a special reach performance executed in performance patterns Z1 to Z5 (see Figure 39 (C))). In other words, a specific development performance preview performance does not simply comprehensively preview that a normal reach performance, super reach performance, or special reach performance will be executed, but is a preview that specifies the specific type of reach performance within a reach performance that will be executed. Then, if it is decided that the comprehensive development performance preview performance will be executed in duplicate, the comprehensive development performance preview performance will be executed first, and then the comprehensive development performance preview performance scheduled to be executed later will be changed (detailed, specified) to a preview performance whose preview content is that a specific reach performance within the reach preview performance will be executed.

Here, in general, all of the normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance include a plurality of reach performance types with different jackpot expectation levels (reliability). For example, even if they are grouped together as the same special reach performance, they include not only special reach performances with high jackpot expectations (reliability) but also special reach performances with low jackpot expectations (reliability). Regarding this point, the same applies to the normal reach performance and the super reach performance. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the jackpot expectation level (reliability) in the variable game based on the development destination of the reach performance (specific reach performance type). Therefore, if it is determined that the comprehensive development performance preview performance is to be executed in duplicate, the comprehensive development performance preview performance is executed first, and then the comprehensive development performance preview performance scheduled to be executed later is executed. By changing the preview performance (detailing and specificity) to a preview performance that indicates that a specific reach performance will be executed during the reach preview performance, it is avoided that a preview performance with the same preview content will be executed. This not only prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and reduces the interest in the game, but also increases the amount of information that the player can obtain by making the preview more detailed. Based on the information obtained, the player can enjoy the progress of the game more, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, if the content of the preview performance that will be executed later is made more detailed (materialized), or if the preview content cannot be stepped up (upgraded), it is possible to change the preview content of the subsequent preview performance. Become.

The group of guaranteed jackpot advance notice performances includes a jackpot advance notice performance in which the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game predicts (expresses or suggests) a jackpot, and a guaranteed jackpot advance notice performance in which the result of the lottery predicts (expresses or suggests) a guaranteed jackpot. The guaranteed jackpot advance notice performance details and steps up (upgrades) the details of the guaranteed jackpot advance notice performance in the sense that the details of the advance notice are guaranteed jackpots. If a predetermined condition is met when it is determined that the jackpot advance notice performances will be executed in duplicate, the jackpot advance notice performance that is scheduled to be executed later is changed to a guaranteed jackpot advance notice performance (the advance notice content is stepped up and detailed). This prevents the execution of an advance notice performance with the same advance notice content, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and thus prevents a decrease in the interest of the game, and also increases the interest of the game by stepping up and detailing the advance notice content from a jackpot to a guaranteed jackpot, allowing the player to enjoy the game while being certain that it is a guaranteed jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Note that a change in the notice content within the same notice content group is limited to a change in the notice content after the change to a notice content regarding an unannounced future event. This prevents the occurrence of a contradiction in which a notice regarding an event that will not occur in the future is executed. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied, a contradiction may be intentionally created in the preview content of a later preview performance as a preview content regarding an event that will not occur in the future. Specific conditions include, for example, that a performance that clearly indicates a jackpot is scheduled to be executed, that a production that clearly indicates that it is a guaranteed and variable jackpot is scheduled to be executed, that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and that a lottery It is conceivable that the result is a guaranteed jackpot, or that a performance such as a special reach performance with high expectations (reliability) that the lottery result will be a jackpot is scheduled to be executed. When such specific conditions are met, by creating a contradiction between the preview content of the later preview performance and the event that will occur in the future, it is possible to create a situation that is advantageous to the player due to the occurrence of the discrepancy, such as the lottery result. It will be possible to know in advance that it will be a jackpot, that a special reach effect will be executed, etc. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the occurrence of a contradiction while expecting the occurrence of a contradiction, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if there are no unannounced future events in the same preview content group, unannounced future events included in other preview content groups may be used as the preview content in the later preview performance. In this way, by using unannounced future events included in other preview content groups as the preview content in the later preview performance, even if there are no unannounced future events, information on future events (performances) that are different from the overlapping content is presented while preventing overlapping content from being predicted in multiple preview performances. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing or recognizing future events (performances) based on the different preview contents, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when a preview performance with a preview content that overlaps with a previously executed preview performance is executed, the execution of a later preview performance is restricted. The restriction method is not limited to changing the preview content of the preview performance to be executed later, but may be other methods. For example, as a method for restricting preview effects to be executed later, it is conceivable that preview effects to be executed later are not executed with a certain probability. This fixed probability is determined, for example, from a range of more than 0% and no more than 100%, preferably from a range of 5% or more and no more than 95%, more preferably from a range of 10% or more and no more than 90%. In this way, when the execution of a later preview effect is restricted, the later preview effect is set to not be executed with a certain probability, making it possible to infer a specific future event based on the setting of a certain probability. Since the game can be provided with a unique gameplay property, the interest of the game is improved. For example, by setting a certain probability according to the lottery result in a jackpot lottery, it is possible to estimate the gameplay that allows you to guess the lottery result, that is, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the lottery result is a jackpot. It can provide great gameplay. Specifically, by setting the fixed probability when the lottery result is a jackpot to be lower than the fixed probability when the lottery result is a loss, that is, the probability of non-execution of the subsequent preview performance is set to be lower than the probability when the lottery result is a jackpot. By making the case of a jackpot larger than the case of a loss, a game feature is provided in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is increased when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed. On the contrary, by setting the fixed probability when the lottery result is a jackpot higher than the fixed probability when the lottery result is a loss, in other words, the probability of non-execution of the subsequent preview performance is reduced by the lottery result. By making the case of a jackpot smaller than the case of a miss, a game property is provided in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is lowered when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed.

Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the preview performance scheduled to be executed later is not executed with a certain probability, the certain probability may be set according to the type of jackpot. For example, it is possible to set the certain probability to decrease in the order of 16R variable probability jackpot, 5R variable probability jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot. In other words, it is possible to lower the probability of not executing the preview performance scheduled to be executed later as the jackpot is more favorable to the player. In this case, when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed, a gameplay characteristic is given in which the expectation of a jackpot that is more favorable to the player is higher, and the interest of the game is improved. Of course, when the certain probability is set according to the type of jackpot, the certain probability may be set to decrease in the order of 16R variable probability jackpot, 5R variable probability jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, or it may be set in another order.

The fixed probability may also be set to be different for a special jackpot and a normal jackpot. For example, the fixed probability may be set lower for a special jackpot than for a normal jackpot, and conversely, the fixed probability may be set lower for a special jackpot than for a normal jackpot. In this way, by making the fixed probability different for a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, the probability of a special jackpot being expected to be different from the probability of a normal jackpot when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if a preview performance that should be executed later is not executed with a certain probability, there is no unannounced future event in the same preview content group, or there is no unannounced future event in any preview content group. may be made a condition. In this case, even if there is no unannounced future event in the same preview content group, or even if there is no unannounced future event in any of the preview content groups, the preview effects that are scheduled to be executed later will be restricted. can. Of course, even if there is an unannounced future event in the same preview content group, or even if there is an unannounced future event in any of the preview content groups, the execution of the preview effect that is scheduled to be executed later will be performed with a certain probability. Alternatively, the execution of a preview effect that is scheduled to be executed later may be limited with a certain probability, regardless of the presence or absence of an unannounced future execution event.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when a preview performance with a preview content that overlaps with a previously executed preview performance is executed, the execution of the later preview performance is restricted. Instead of the performance, it is also possible to execute a performance with contents unrelated to future occurrence events in the variable game. For example, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a later preview performance, a notice regarding a variable game with respect to the suspension that will be executed after the end of the variable game (for example, a notice of the occurrence of a look-ahead performance, a notice of the occurrence of a look-ahead performance, etc.) (advance notice of contents, notice of change in hold display), game explanation (explanation regarding various game settings such as playing method during jackpot game, jackpot probability, volume adjustment method, character selection method, etc.), etc. In this way, instead of the later preview performance, a performance with content unrelated to the future occurrence event in the relevant variable game is executed, so that there is no unforeseen future event in the relevant variable game. However, it becomes possible to restrict the execution of a preview performance that will be executed later.

Further, the classification of the preview content into preview performance groups may be performed randomly without dividing the content into the same type or type of content, or may be randomly selected without dividing the preview content into preview performance groups. The preview content of the preview performance to be executed later may be changed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 89, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of this embodiment, when a variable pattern command is received, in addition to the process in the first embodiment described above, Setting processing is executed.

[Command Judgment Process]
<Step S3401>
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), it determines the stop symbol combination and the type of presentation (presentation pattern) in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above (step S2103), and further executes the advance notice presentation setting process (step S3401), executes the processes of steps S2104 to S2105 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and ends the command determination process. Here, the advance notice presentation setting process is a process of determining various advance notice presentations to be executed in the variable game, and storing the determined advance notice presentations in the RAM 512.

[Preview performance setting process]
In the preview performance setting process, a pseudo consecutive preview performance, a step-up performance, a dialogue performance, a character group performance, and other preview performances are set. Examples of other preview performances include mini character performances other than character group performances, cut-in performances, voice performances, operation button performances, role-operation performances, and composite performances of two or more of these performances. Examples of composite performances include step-up performances with dialogue, cut-in performances with dialogue, step-up performances with voice, cut-in performances with voice, dialogue performances by operating the operation button, step-up performances by operating the operation button, cut-in performances by operating the operation button, role-operation performances by operating the operation button, and the like.

Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 72. As shown in FIG. 73, in the preview effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 performs pseudo continuous preview effect setting process (step S3501), step-up effect setting process (step S3502), dialogue effect setting process (step S3503), The character group effect setting process (step S3504) and other advance notice effect setting process (step S3505) are executed, and the advance notice effect setting process is ended. The details of the pseudo series preview effect setting process (step S3501), step-up effect setting process (step S3502), dialogue effect setting process (step S3503), and character group effect setting process (step S3504) are shown in FIGS. This will be described later with reference to 84.

Here, FIG. 74 shows the relationship between various preview effects and the preview contents. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit for pseudo consecutive wins is four times, and the upper limit for step-ups in step-up effects is five times.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), the pseudo-sequence preview performance is a performance that foretells that a pseudo-sequence will be executed, including pseudo-sequence execution notice, pseudo-sequence 2 preview performance, pseudo-sequence 3 preview performance, and pseudo-sequence 3 preview performance. Includes preview performance and pseudo-ren 4 preview performance. Note that the pseudo series 2 preview performance, the pseudo series 3 preview performance, the pseudo series 3 preview performance, and the pseudo series 4 preview performance are preview performances that foretell the total number of pseudo series. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice performance may be executed, for example, in a high-speed fluctuation game performance, but is not executed in a normal reach performance, a super reach performance, and a special reach performance. There is a possibility that the pseudo consecutive preview performance is executed multiple times depending on the total number of pseudo continuous preview performances, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, for example, the execution timing is different from other preview performances. The process is set three times: a certain timing Ta, a certain timing Tb, and a certain timing Tc, and there is a possibility that it will be executed up to three times.

The pseudo consecutive execution notice is an effect that only informs that a pseudo consecutive will be executed, and is an effect in which, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a text image indicating that a pseudo consecutive will be executed, such as "one more time" or "NEXT" is displayed (see FIG. 75 (A)). The pseudo consecutive execution notice can be set when an effect pattern is set in which at least one pseudo consecutive will be executed.

Pseudo series 2 preview performance is a performance that foretells that the total number of pseudo series is 2 times, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a pseudo series such as "one more time" will be executed. In addition to the character image indicating ``NEXT x 2'', a character image indicating that the total number of pseudo-runs is 2 is displayed (see FIG. 75(B)). Furthermore, the Pseudo-Reach 2 preview performance is also a performance that foretells that the normal reach performance will be executed. In other words, the Pseudo-Reach 2 Preview Performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that the total number of pseudo-sequences is 2 and that a normal reach performance will be executed, and is a performance in which two pseudo-sequences and a normal reach performance will be executed. Can be set if a pattern is set.

The pseudo-series 3 preview performance is a performance that foretells that the total number of pseudo-sequences is 3, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a pseudo-sequence such as "one more time" will be executed. In addition to the character image indicating , a character image indicating that the total number of pseudo-runs is 3, such as "NEXT x 3", is displayed (see FIG. 75(C)). Furthermore, the Pseudo-Run 3 preview performance is also a performance that foretells that the Super Reach performance will be executed. In other words, the pseudo series 3 preview performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that the total number of pseudo series is 3 times and that a super reach performance will be executed, and the pseudo series 3 times and super reach performance will be executed. This can be set when a performance pattern has been set.

The pseudo 4 consecutive hits preview performance is a performance that predicts that the total number of pseudo consecutive hits is four, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a text image such as "one more time" indicating that a pseudo consecutive hit will be performed, as well as a text image such as "NEXT x 4" indicating that the total number of pseudo consecutive hits is four (see FIG. 75 (D)). The pseudo 4 consecutive hits preview performance is also a performance that predicts that a special reach performance will be performed and that a jackpot has been hit. In other words, the pseudo 4 consecutive hits preview performance is a preview performance that predicts that the total number of pseudo consecutive hits is four, that a special reach performance will be performed, and that a jackpot has been hit, and a performance pattern in which four pseudo consecutive hits and a special reach performance will be performed is set, and can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In this embodiment, only the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance is determined in the pseudo consecutive win preview performance setting process, and the pseudo consecutive win 2 preview performance, pseudo consecutive win 3 preview performance, pseudo consecutive win 3 preview performance, and pseudo consecutive win 4 preview performance can only be set in the preview performance resetting process described below (see FIG. 86).

In addition, in this embodiment, a pseudo consecutive win execution notification and a total number of pseudo consecutive wins notification are set as the pseudo consecutive win notification effects. However, instead of or in addition to the total number of pseudo consecutive wins notification effect, an unexecuted pseudo consecutive wins notification effect that notifies the number of pseudo consecutive wins that have not been executed may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the step-up performance is a preview performance in which the performance steps up in stages, such as white background SU1 performance, white background SU2 performance, white background SU3 performance, and white background SU4. The production includes a white background SU5 production, a red background SU1 production, a red background SU2 production, a red background SU3 production, a red background SU4 production, and a red background SU5 production.

In this embodiment, the step-up effect may be executed once in a high-speed variable play effect, for example, and is not executed in a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a special reach effect. Of course, the step-up effect may be executed in a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a special reach effect, and the step-up effect may be executed multiple times. Also, in this embodiment, multiple execution timings of the step-up effect are set, and the step-up effect may be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, three execution timings of the step-up effect, namely, timing Td, timing Te, and timing Tf, which are different from the other preview effects, are set during the high-speed variable play effect, and the step-up effect may be executed at any of these timings Td, timing Te, and timing Tf.

The white background SU1 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to one stage out of five stages, and the background at this time is white. Note that although the white background SU1 effect has no particular preview content, it is included in the preview effect because it is a type of step-up effect. This white background SU1 effect can be set regardless of which effect pattern is set.

The white background SU2 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to two of the five stages, and the background at this time is white. This white background SU2 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that a normal reach performance will be executed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed is set.

The white background SU3 effect is a preview effect in which three out of five stages are executed, with a white background. This white background SU3 effect is a preview effect that notifies you that a super reach effect will be executed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a super reach effect is executed is set.

The white background SU4 effect is a preview effect in which four out of five stages are executed, with a white background. This white background SU4 effect is a preview effect that notifies you that a special reach effect will be executed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach effect is executed is set.

The white background SU5 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to the final stage of the five stages, and the background at this time is white. This white background SU5 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that it is a jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

The red background SU1 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to one stage out of five stages, and the background at this time is red. This red background SU1 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that a normal reach performance will be performed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is set.

The red background SU2 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to two of the five stages, and the background at this time is red. This red background SU2 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that a super reach performance will be executed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a super reach performance is executed is set.

The red background SU3 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to three of the five stages, and the background at this time is red. This red background SU3 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that a special reach performance will be executed, and can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach performance is executed is set.

The red background SU4 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to four of the five stages, and the background at this time is red. This red background SU4 performance is a preview performance that indicates that the lottery is a jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

The red background SU5 effect is a preview effect in which the effect is executed up to the final stage of the five stages, and the background at this time is red. This red background SU5 performance is a preview performance whose preview content is that it is a probability-variable jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 74(C), the dialogue performance is a preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed, for example, a preview performance that previews a development performance, etc., by the color and content of the dialogue image. The dialogue performance includes white dialogue 1 performance, white dialogue 2 performance, white dialogue 3 performance, white dialogue 4 performance, white dialogue 5 performance, red dialogue 1 performance, red dialogue 2 performance, red dialogue 3 performance, red dialogue 4 performance, and red dialogue 5 performance.

In this embodiment, the dialogue performance may be executed once in, for example, a high-speed fluctuating game performance, and is not executed in a normal reach performance, a super reach performance, and a special reach performance. Of course, the dialogue performance may be performed in the normal reach performance, the super reach performance, and the special reach performance, and the dialogue performance may be performed multiple times. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of execution timings for the dialogue production are set, and the dialogue production may be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, three timings, timing Tg, timing Th, and timing Ti, which are different from other preview performances, are set as the execution timing of the dialogue performance during the high-speed fluctuation game performance, and these timings are set during the high-speed fluctuation game performance. The dialogue performance may be executed at any one of timing Tg, timing Th, and timing Ti.

The White Dialogue 1 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 1 image is displayed in white text. Although the White Dialogue 1 effect does not have any particular preview content, it is included in the preview effect because it is a type of dialogue effect. This White Dialogue 1 effect can be set regardless of which effect pattern is set.

The White Dialogue 2 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 2 image is displayed in white text, and the preview content is that a normal reach effect will be executed. This White Dialogue 2 effect can be set when a performance pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed is set.

The White Dialogue 3 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 3 image is displayed in white text, and the preview content is that a Super Reach effect will be executed. This White Dialogue 3 effect can be set when a performance pattern in which a Super Reach effect is executed is set.

The White Dialogue 4 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 4 image is displayed in white text, and the preview effect indicates that a special reach effect will be executed. This White Dialogue 4 effect can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach effect is executed is set.

The White Dialogue 5 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 5 image is displayed in white text, and the preview effect indicates that a jackpot has been won. This White Dialogue 5 effect can be set if the lottery result is a jackpot.

The red line 1 effect is a preview effect in which a line 1 image is displayed in red letters, and is a preview effect in which the normal reach effect and the pseudo link are to be executed. This red line 1 performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance and a pseudo series are executed is set.

The red line 2 effect is a preview effect in which a line 2 image is displayed in red letters, and is a preview effect that indicates that a super reach effect and a pseudo link will be executed. This red line 2 performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a super reach performance and a pseudo-reaction are executed is set.

The Red Dialogue 3 effect is a preview effect in which the Dialogue 3 image is displayed in red text, and the preview content is that a special reach effect and pseudo consecutive hits will be executed. This Red Dialogue 3 effect can be set when a performance pattern is set in which a special reach effect and pseudo consecutive hits will be executed.

The red line 4 effect is a preview effect in which a line 4 image is displayed in red letters, a special reach effect and a pseudo-run will be executed, and furthermore, it is a preview effect in which a jackpot is announced. This red line 4 performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach performance and a pseudo series are executed is set, and the lottery result is a jackpot.

The red line 5 effect is a preview effect in which a line 5 image is displayed in red letters, a special reach effect and a pseudo-run will be executed, and furthermore, it is a preview effect in which a probability-variable jackpot is announced. This red line 5 performance is set when a performance pattern in which a special reach performance and a pseudo-continuation are executed is set, and can be set when the lottery result is a probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 74 (D), the character group performance is a performance in which a group of mini characters move left and right, up and down, etc. on the pattern display unit 341, and includes, for example, a character A group performance, a character B group performance, a character C group performance, a character D group performance, a character E group performance, a rare character group performance, and an all-character mix group performance.

In this embodiment, the character group performance may be executed once in, for example, any one of the high-speed variable play performance, normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance. Of course, it may be executed in any one of the high-speed variable play performance, normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance, and the character group performance may be executed multiple times. Also, in this embodiment, multiple execution timings of the character group performance are set, and the character group performance may be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, five timings are set for the execution timing of the character group performance, namely, timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, and timing Tn, which are different from the other preview performances, and the character group performance may be executed at any of these timings Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, and timing Tn.

The character A group performance is a performance in which a large number of mini-characters A move on the symbol display section 341, and it foretells that a super reach performance will be executed and that the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is 33% or higher. It's a performance. This character A group performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a super reach performance is executed is set.

The character B group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini-characters B move across the pattern display section 341, and is an effect that notifies the player that a super reach effect will be executed and that the expected probability (reliability) of a jackpot is 44% or higher. This character B group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which a super reach effect is executed is set.

The character C group performance is a performance in which a large number of mini-characters C move on the symbol display section 341, and it foretells that a special reach performance will be executed and that the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is 55% or higher. It's a performance. This character C group performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach performance is set.

The character D group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini-characters D move across the pattern display section 341, and is an effect that notifies the player that a special reach effect will be executed and that the expected probability (reliability) of a jackpot is 66% or higher. This character D group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which a special reach effect is executed is set.

The character E group performance is a performance in which a large number of mini-characters E move on the symbol display section 341, and it foretells that a special reach performance will be executed and that the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is 77% or higher. It's a performance. This character E group performance can be set when a performance pattern in which a special reach performance is set.

The rare character group effect is an effect in which a large number of rare mini-characters move around the pattern display section 341, and is an effect that foretells that a special reach effect will be executed and that a jackpot has been won. This character C group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which a special reach effect will be executed is set and the lottery result is a jackpot. Note that rare mini-characters are characters that are unlikely to appear in variable game effects, for example, and are mini-characters in character group effects that have a low selection rate.

The all-character mixed group effect is an effect in which all characters, mini-characters A to E and rare characters, move around the pattern display section 341, and is an effect that notifies the player that a special reach effect will be executed and that a jackpot has been reached. This all-character mixed group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which a special reach effect will be executed is set and the lottery result is a jackpot.

In this way, in this embodiment, in various preview performances, it is predicted that a pseudo consecutive hit will be performed, that a pseudo consecutive hit will be performed twice, that a pseudo consecutive hit will be performed three times, that a pseudo consecutive hit will be performed four times, that a normal reach performance will be performed, that a super reach performance will be performed, that a special reach performance will be performed, that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and that the lottery result will be a guaranteed jackpot. In other words, the preview contents in various preview performances can be classified into a pseudo consecutive hit preview content group related to the preview of a pseudo consecutive hit, a development performance preview content group related to the development performance, and a jackpot confirmation preview content group related to the confirmation of a jackpot. Here, Figures 76(A) to 76(C) are diagrams showing the relationship between the preview content of the preview performance and the preview level.

As shown in FIG. 76(A), the pseudo consecutive prediction content group includes a pseudo consecutive execution prediction, a total number of pseudo consecutive times of 2 predictions, a total number of pseudo consecutive times of 3 predictions, and a total number of pseudo consecutive times of 4 predictions. The prediction content level is low for the pseudo consecutive execution prediction, and high for the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 2 predictions, the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 3 predictions, and the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 4 predictions. Also, the pseudo consecutive execution prediction is low, and the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 2 predictions, the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 3 predictions, and the total number of pseudo consecutive times of 4 predictions correspond to detailed prediction content in that they predict the total number of pseudo consecutive times. And when it is planned to execute multiple overlapping prediction performances with the prediction content that a pseudo consecutive will be executed, for example, when a red dialogue 1 performance is executed first and then a pseudo consecutive execution prediction is scheduled to be executed, the pseudo consecutive execution prediction scheduled to be executed later is changed to a pseudo consecutive 2 prediction performance, a pseudo consecutive 3 prediction performance, or a pseudo consecutive 4 prediction performance at the time of execution of the later prediction performance, depending on the total number of pseudo consecutive times executed in the variable game.

In this way, when multiple overlapping preview performances are scheduled to be executed with the preview content indicating that a pseudo consecutive win will be executed, the pseudo consecutive win execution preview scheduled to be executed later is changed to the total number of pseudo consecutive wins preview (pseudo consecutive win 2 preview performance, pseudo consecutive win 3 preview performance, or pseudo consecutive win 4 preview performance) depending on the total number of pseudo consecutive wins executed in the variable game, and by avoiding the execution of preview performances with the same preview content, not only is it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and thus prevent a decrease in interest in the game, but also the amount of information available to the player is increased by the detailed preview content, allowing the player to enjoy the progress of the game more based on the newly obtained information, improving the interest in the game.

In addition, if the total number of pseudo consecutive wins executed in the variable play is one, that is, if the advance notice cannot be stepped up or detailed, for example, instead of the pseudo consecutive win execution notice scheduled to be executed later, when the later advance notice performance is executed, it is changed to an advance notice regarding a development performance, an advance notice regarding a big win, an advance notice unrelated to the variable play (an advance notice of an event that will occur in the variable play after the next change (for example, a change in the reserved display, an advance notice of the execution of a look-ahead performance, an advance notice of the contents of the look-ahead performance, an advance notice of a big win, etc.), a game explanation), etc., or the pseudo consecutive win execution notice scheduled to be executed later is not executed with a certain probability. In this way, even if the advance notice cannot be stepped up or detailed, by executing an advance notice performance with the same advance notice content, the player's discomfort is prevented, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), the group of development performance preview contents includes a normal reach performance preview, a super reach performance preview, and a special reach performance preview. The preview content level is the lowest for the normal reach performance preview, the highest for the special reach performance preview, and intermediate for the super reach performance preview. And, when it is planned that multiple overlapping preview performances will be executed with the preview content indicating that a normal reach performance will be executed as the preview content, for example, the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later will be changed to a preview of the execution of a super reach performance or a special reach performance (the preview content will be stepped up, upgraded). Also, when it is planned that multiple overlapping preview performances will be executed with the preview content indicating that a super reach performance will be executed as the preview content, for example, the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later will be changed to a preview of the execution of a special reach performance (the preview content will be stepped up, upgraded).

In this way, if multiple overlapping preview performances are scheduled to be executed, with the preview content indicating that a development performance with the same preview content level will be executed, when the later preview performance is executed, the later preview performance preview is changed (stepped up) to a development performance preview with a higher preview content level. This avoids the execution of a preview performance with the same preview content, which not only prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and thus prevents a decrease in interest in the game, but also makes it more enjoyable to play the game, as the preview content is stepped up and it is expected that the player will be in a more advantageous state, which increases the interest in the game.

In addition, if the type of presentation (presentation pattern) to be executed in the variable game is one in which the advancement presentation cannot be stepped up, the advancement presentation to be executed later is changed so that the advancement presentation is detailed. For example, if the final individual presentation is set as the presentation type (presentation pattern), and the overlapping advancement presentation is the execution of a normal reach presentation (if the advancement content level is the same), the advancement presentation to be executed later is changed (detailed, specified) to which normal reach presentation among the normal reach presentations will be executed. In this way, by detailed (specified), the advancement presentation to be executed later is prevented from being executed with the same advancement content, even if the advancement content cannot be stepped up, and the player's discomfort is prevented, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. In addition, by detailed advancement presentation, the player can know the specific content of the advancement presentation. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game based on the specified content of the advancement presentation (expectation of a big win).

As shown in FIG. 76(C), the group of confirmed jackpot prediction contents includes a jackpot prediction and a guaranteed jackpot prediction, and the prediction content level of the guaranteed jackpot prediction is higher than that of the jackpot prediction. If multiple overlapping prediction performances are scheduled to be executed with the prediction content indicating a jackpot, if the lottery result indicates a guaranteed jackpot, the prediction content of the subsequent prediction performance scheduled to be executed will be changed (stepped up, detailed) to a prediction of a guaranteed jackpot.

In this way, if multiple overlapping preview effects are scheduled to be executed with the lottery result being a jackpot, the later scheduled jackpot preview is changed to a guaranteed jackpot preview, which prevents preview effects with the same preview content from being executed, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable and reducing their interest in the game. Not only that, but the player can know that it is a guaranteed jackpot and can enjoy playing the game with peace of mind.

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the contents of the announcement in the later announcement performance cannot be stepped up, so for example, the contents of the announcement in the later announcement performance are changed to an announcement regarding a pseudo consecutive win, an announcement regarding a development performance, an announcement of an event that will occur in the next or subsequent variable play (for example, a change in the hold display, an announcement of the execution of a look-ahead performance, an announcement of the contents of the look-ahead performance, an announcement of a jackpot, etc.), a game explanation), or the pseudo consecutive execution announcement scheduled to be executed later is made non-executable with a certain probability. In this way, even if the announcement contents cannot be stepped up or detailed, an announcement performance with the same announcement contents is avoided from being executed, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevents a decrease in the interest of the game.

Similarly, even if multiple overlapping preview performances are scheduled to be executed with the preview content of a guaranteed jackpot, it is not possible to step up or make the preview content more detailed. When the preview performance is executed later, the preview content may be a preview regarding a pseudo-relationship, a notice regarding an advanced performance, a performance unrelated to the variable game in question (a notice of an event that will occur in a variable game after the next variation (for example, a pending display change, pre-reading, etc.). (e.g. performance execution notice, pre-read performance content notice, jackpot notice), game description), etc., or a pseudo-continuation execution notice scheduled to be executed later will not be executed with a certain probability.

In addition, if the preview content overlaps with a jackpot or a fixed-variable jackpot, the player will be happy with the preview content, so the duplicate content will be announced without changing the later jackpot notice or fixed-variable jackpot notice to another notice. may also be executed.

As mentioned above, if multiple preview performances with overlapping preview contents are scheduled to be executed, the preview contents of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later may be changed to other preview contents when the later preview performance is executed, or there is a certain probability that the later preview performance will not be executed. Such changes to the preview contents of the later preview performance are made in the preview performance reset process (FIGS. 86 to 90) in the preview performance process in FIG. 85 described below, by determining whether the preview contents overlap from the history of the preview performances that have already been executed, and by referring to the performance type (performance pattern) determined in step S2103 of the command determination process in FIG. 72 and the lottery results in the jackpot lottery.

Here, FIG. 76(D) is a diagram for explaining the memory area for resetting the notice content set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. 76(D), the memory area for resetting the notice content has a win/lose information memory area, a performance pattern memory area, and a notice performance execution history memory area.

The winning/losing information storage area is an area for storing winning/losing information (information regarding the lottery result in the jackpot lottery), and is referred to by the MPU 51, for example, when determining whether or not the jackpot notice performance can be stepped up to a guaranteed winning jackpot. In this winning/losing information storage area, for example, when information capable of identifying the lottery result is included in the change pattern command, winning/losing information is stored based on the change pattern command when the change pattern command is received. On the other hand, the winning/losing information stored in the winning/losing information storage area is cleared when the variable game ends. Note that, when information capable of identifying the winning/losing information (lottery result) is transmitted as a command separate from the change pattern command, winning/losing information is stored in the winning/losing information storage area when the separate command is received.
Remember.

The presentation pattern memory area is an area that stores the presentation type (presentation pattern), and is referenced by the MPU 51, for example, when determining whether the contents of the preview by the advanced presentation preview can be stepped up or detailed (concrete). This presentation pattern memory area stores the presentation type (presentation pattern) when the presentation type (presentation pattern) is determined by receiving a variable pattern in the command determination process of FIG. 72. On the other hand, the presentation type (presentation pattern) stored in the presentation pattern memory area is cleared when the variable play ends.

The preview performance execution history storage area is an area that stores executed preview performances (preview contents). For example, the preview content of a preview performance to be executed may be foreshadowed by a previously executed preview performance in the variable game. It is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining whether or not the process has been completed. In this preview performance execution history storage area, the preview performance (preview content) is stored every time the preview performance is executed. On the other hand, the executed preview performance (notice content) in the preview performance execution history storage area is cleared when the variable game ends. In this way, by setting the memory area for resetting the preview content having the preview performance execution history storage area in the RAM 512, the preview performance (preview content) stored in the preview performance execution history storage area can be referenced. It is possible to check whether there is any overlap in the preview contents of the performances when the preview performances are executed.

In addition, if the win/loss information and the performance pattern are stored in a memory area of RAM 512 other than the memory area for resetting the preview content, the win/loss information storage area and the preview performance execution history storage area in the memory area for resetting the preview content can be omitted.

[Pseudo serial trailer effect setting process]
In the pseudo consecutive preview performance setting process executed in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73, the pseudo consecutive preview performance setting is set according to the number of pseudo consecutive performances to be executed in the high-speed fluctuating game of the variable game performance. Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the pseudo consecutive notice effect setting process.

<Steps S3601 and S3602>
As shown in FIG. 78, in the pseudo continuous notice performance setting process, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern determined by receiving the fluctuation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. (Step S3601), and the number of pseudo consecutive runs specified from the effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area set in the RAM 512 (Step S3602). In this embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents, or may be obtained from a memory set separately from this effect pattern storage area. If a performance pattern is stored in an area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the presentation pattern in the variable game is for executing a pseudo consecutive presentation based on the number of pseudo consecutive presentations stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 512 in step S3602. If the presentation pattern in the variable game is for executing a pseudo consecutive presentation (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604, and if the presentation pattern in the variable game is not for executing a pseudo consecutive presentation (step S3603: No), the MPU 51 ends the pseudo consecutive presentation notification setting process without setting a pseudo consecutive presentation notification.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the performance pattern in the variable game is to execute a pseudo-continuation performance (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a pseudo-continuation notice performance according to the number of times the pseudo-continuation performance is executed in the performance pattern, and (Step S3604), the content of the preview content storage area is updated in accordance with the determined pseudo consecutive preview performance (Step S3605), and the pseudo consecutive preview performance setting process is ended.

Here, the preview content storage area is set in the RAM 512 and updated every time various preview effect setting processes are executed. This preview content storage area is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not it is the timing to execute a preview performance, and if it is the timing to execute a preview performance, it specifies the preview performance scheduled to be executed at the execution timing. Referenced for.

[Step-up effect setting process]
In the step-up performance setting process executed in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73, a step-up performance is set based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the performance pattern type in the variable game. Here, FIG. 79(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the step-up effect setting process.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 79(A), in the step-up effect setting process, the MPU 51 stores the effect pattern determined by receiving the fluctuation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. Identification is made from the stored contents (step S3701). In this embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents, or may be obtained from a memory set separately from this effect pattern storage area. If a performance pattern is stored in an area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3702>
In step S3702, the MPU 51 specifies the success/failure determination result (the lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, if the change pattern command includes information that can identify the lottery result, the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R certain variable jackpot flag, 16R It is specified from the probability variable jackpot flag). For example, the MPU 51 can specify that the winning/failure determination result is a 5R normal jackpot when the 5R normal jackpot flag is on, and can specify that the winning/failure judgment result is a 5R surefire jackpot when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on. , when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, it can be specified that the winning/failure determination result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and when the jackpot flag is off, it can be specified that the winning/failure determination result is a loss.

In addition, if information that can identify the result of winning/failure determination (lottery result) is sent as a separate command from the fluctuation pattern command, the winning/failure information is stored in the winning/failure information storage area when the separate command is received. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, since the validity information that can specify the validity determination result (lottery result) is stored in the validity information storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents set in the RAM 512. , the validity determination result may be specified from the validity information stored in the validity information storage area.

<Steps S3703 to S3705>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the step-up performance based on the performance pattern in the variable game specified in step S3701 and the validity determination result specified in step S3702 (step S3703), and executes the step-up performance. The content is determined (step S3704). Then, the MPU 51 updates the execution timing of the step-up performance determined in step S3703 and the performance content of the step-up performance determined in step S3703 by updating the storage content of the preview content storage area set in the RAM 512. The information is stored in the preview content storage area, and the step-up effect setting process is ended. Note that if it is determined in step S3703 not to perform the step-up effect, the contents of the preview contents storage area are not updated.

Here, FIG. 79(B) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up performance timing selection table that is referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3703 in order to determine the execution timing of the step-up performance. As shown in FIG. 79(B), in the step-up performance timing selection table, the success/failure determination result (big hit lottery The execution timing of the step-up performance is specified for each lottery result). In this embodiment, the step-up performance is executed at any one of timing Td, timing Te, and timing Tf (see FIG. 77) where the high-speed fluctuation performance of the fluctuation game is set, and these timings Td, timing Te, The execution timing of the step-up effect from timing Tf is determined by the value of the SU effect timing determination counter.

In addition, in the step-up performance timing selection table shown in FIG. 79(B), the execution timing of the step-up performance is equal to timing Td, timing Te, and timing Tf in any of the success/fail judgment results (lottery results in the jackpot lottery). It will be decided either way. However, the distribution of the execution timing of the step-up effect may be uneven, and the distribution of the execution timing may be different for each validity determination result. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the step-up effect is distributed to any one of the timing Td, the timing Te, and the timing Tf, but it is also possible to set an allocation of non-execution of the step-up effect.

Here, FIGS. 80(A) to 80(C) are diagrams showing an example of a step-up performance type selection table that is referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3704 to determine the performance content of the step-up performance. Specifically, FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up performance type selection table that is referred to when the performance pattern of the variable game is a normal reach performance pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds. , FIG. 80(B) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up performance type selection table that is referred to when the performance pattern of the variable game is a super reach performance pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up performance type selection table that is referred to when the performance pattern of the variable game is a special reach performance pattern with a variable display time of 90 seconds. In addition, in FIG. 80, an example of the step-up performance type selection table when the performance pattern is non-reach is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 80(A) to 80(C), in the step-up effect type selection table for each effect pattern, the value of the step-up effect type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. Accordingly, a step-up performance type is defined for each win/fail determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). In addition, in the step-up performance type selection table of each performance pattern, there is a classification of non-execution of step-up performance, and if the value of the step-up performance type counter corresponds to the distribution of non-execution, step-up performance is not executed.

[Dialogue presentation setting processing]
In the dialogue presentation setting process executed in the notice presentation setting process of Fig. 73, the dialogue presentation is set based on the lottery result in the big win lottery and the presentation pattern type in the variable game. Here, Fig. 81 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the dialogue presentation setting process.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 81(A), in the dialogue production setting process, the MPU 51 stores the production pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process in FIG. 72 in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Identification based on the content (step S3801). In this embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents, or may be obtained from a memory set separately from this effect pattern storage area. If a performance pattern is stored in an area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3802>
In step S3802, the MPU 51 identifies the winning/losing judgment result (the lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, when information capable of identifying the lottery result is included in the change pattern command, the winning/losing judgment result is identified from the jackpot flags (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R variable probability jackpot flag, 16R variable probability jackpot flag) that can be set when the change pattern command is received. For example, the MPU 51 can identify the winning/losing judgment result as a 5R normal jackpot when the 5R variable probability jackpot flag is on, identify the winning/losing judgment result as a 5R variable probability jackpot when the 5R variable probability jackpot flag is on, identify the winning/losing judgment result as a 16R variable probability jackpot when the 16R variable probability jackpot flag is on, and identify the winning/losing judgment result as a miss when the jackpot flag is off.

In addition, if information that can identify the result of winning/failure determination (lottery result) is sent as a separate command from the fluctuation pattern command, the winning/failure information is stored in the winning/failure information storage area when the separate command is received. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, since the validity information that can specify the validity determination result (lottery result) is stored in the validity information storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents set in the RAM 512. , the validity determination result may be specified from the validity information stored in the validity information storage area.

<Steps S3803 to S3805>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the dialogue presentation based on the presentation pattern in the variable game specified in step S3801 and the winning/losing judgment result specified in step S3802 (step S3803), and determines the presentation content of the dialogue presentation (step S3804). Then, the MPU 51 stores the execution timing of the dialogue presentation determined in step S3803 and the presentation content of the dialogue presentation determined in step S3803 in the notice content storage area by updating the storage content of the notice content storage area set in the RAM 512, and ends the dialogue presentation setting process. Note that if it is determined in step S3803 that the dialogue presentation is not to be performed, the contents of the notice content storage area are not updated.

Here, FIG. 81(B) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue production timing selection table that is referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3803 to determine the execution timing of dialogue production. As shown in FIG. 81(B), in the dialogue performance timing selection table, the success/failure determination result (the lottery in the jackpot lottery The execution timing of the dialogue performance is defined for each (result). In this embodiment, the dialogue performance is executed at any one of timing Tg, timing Th, and timing Ti (see FIG. 77) where the high-speed fluctuation performance of the fluctuation game is set, and these timings Tg, Timing Th, and Timing From Ti, the execution timing of the dialogue performance is determined by the value of the dialogue performance timing determination counter.

In the dialogue performance timing selection table shown in FIG. 81(B), the execution timing of the dialogue performance is determined to be either timing Tg, timing Th, or timing Ti evenly for any hit/miss judgment result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). However, the allocation of the execution timing of the dialogue performance may be uneven, and the allocation of the execution timing may differ for each hit/miss judgment result. Also, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the dialogue performance is allocated to either timing Tg, timing Th, or timing Ti, but it is also possible to set an allocation for not executing the dialogue performance.

Here, Fig. 82(A) to Fig. 82(C) are diagrams showing an example of a dialogue presentation type selection table referenced by the MPU 51 in step S3704 to determine the presentation content of the dialogue presentation. Specifically, Fig. 80(A) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue presentation type selection table referenced when the presentation pattern of the variable game is a normal reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds, Fig. 80(B) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue presentation type selection table referenced when the presentation pattern of the variable game is a super reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds, and Fig. 80(C) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue presentation type selection table referenced when the presentation pattern of the variable game is a special reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 90 seconds. Note that in Fig. 82, an example of a dialogue presentation type selection table when the presentation pattern is a non-reach is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82(A) to 82(C), in the dialogue performance type selection table for each performance pattern, depending on the value of the dialogue performance type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. A line production type is defined for each success/failure determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). In addition, in the dialogue performance type selection table of each performance pattern, there is a classification of non-execution of dialogue performance, and if the value of the dialogue performance type counter corresponds to the classification of non-execution, the dialogue performance is not executed.

[Character group performance setting process]
In the character group performance setting process executed in the advance notice performance setting process of Fig. 73, the character group performance is set based on the lottery result in the big win lottery and the performance pattern type in the variable game. Here, Fig. 83 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character group performance setting process.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 83(A), in the character group effect setting process, the MPU 51 stores the effect pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. Identification is made from the stored contents (step S3901). In this embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76(D)) of the storage area for resetting the preview contents, or may be obtained from a memory set separately from this effect pattern storage area. If a performance pattern is stored in an area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3902>
In step S3902, the MPU 51 specifies the success/failure determination result (the lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, if the change pattern command includes information that can identify the lottery result, the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R certain variable jackpot flag, 16R It is specified from the probability variable jackpot flag). For example, the MPU 51 can specify that the winning/failure determination result is a 5R normal jackpot when the 5R normal jackpot flag is on, and can specify that the winning/failure judgment result is a 5R surefire jackpot when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on. , when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, it can be specified that the winning/failure determination result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and when the jackpot flag is off, it can be specified that the winning/failure determination result is a loss.

In addition, if information capable of identifying the winning/losing judgment result (lottery result) is sent as a command separate from the variation pattern command, the winning/losing information is stored in the winning/losing information storage area when the separate command is received. Also, in this embodiment, winning/losing information capable of identifying the winning/losing judgment result (lottery result) is stored in the winning/losing information storage area (Figure 76 (D)) of the memory area for resetting the notice content set in RAM 512, so the winning/losing judgment result may be identified from the winning/losing information stored in the winning/losing information storage area.

<Steps S3903 to S3905>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the character group performance based on the performance pattern in the variable game specified in step S3901 and the validity determination result specified in step S3902 (step S3903), and executes the character group performance. The content is determined (step S3904). Then, the MPU 51 updates the execution timing of the character group effect determined in step S3903 and the effect content of the character group effect determined in step S3903 by updating the storage content of the preview content storage area set in the RAM 512. The information is stored in the preview content storage area, and the character group effect setting process ends. Note that if it is determined in step S3903 not to perform the character group presentation, the contents of the preview contents storage area are not updated.

Here, FIG. 83(B) and FIG. 83(C) are diagrams showing an example of a character group presentation timing selection table referenced by the MPU 51 in step S3903 to determine the timing of execution of the character group presentation. Specifically, FIG. 83(B) is a diagram showing an example of a character group presentation timing selection table referenced when the presentation pattern of the variable game is a super reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds, and FIG. 83(C) is a diagram showing an example of a character group presentation timing selection table referenced when the presentation pattern of the variable game is a special reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 90 seconds. Note that in this embodiment, when the presentation pattern in the variable game is a non-reach presentation pattern or a normal reach presentation pattern, the character group presentation is not executed. Of course, when the presentation pattern in the variable game is a non-reach presentation pattern or a normal reach presentation pattern, the character group presentation may be executed.

As shown in Figures 83(B) and 83(C), in the character group presentation timing selection table, the execution timing of the character group presentation is regulated for each win/lose determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery) by the value of the character group presentation timing determination counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 35.

As shown in FIG. 83(B), when the performance pattern is a super reach performance pattern, timing Tj is set to high-speed fluctuation performance, timing Tk is set to normal reach performance, timing Tl is set to super reach performance. The character group effect can be executed at any of the timings Tm (see FIG. 77), and the execution timing of the character group effect is determined from these timings Tj, Tk, Tl, and Tm by the character group effect timing determination counter. Determined by value.

In the character group performance timing selection table in the super reach performance pattern shown in FIG. 83(B), the execution timing of the character group performance is determined to be either timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, or timing Tm evenly for any hit/miss judgment result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). However, the allocation of the execution timing of the character group performance may be uneven, and the allocation of the execution timing may differ for each hit/miss judgment result. Also, in this embodiment, in the super reach performance pattern, the execution timing of the character group performance is allocated to either timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, or timing Tm, but it is also possible to set an allocation for non-execution of the character group performance.

As shown in FIG. 83 (C), when the presentation pattern is a special reach presentation pattern, the character group presentation may be executed at any of the timing Tj set for the high speed fluctuation presentation, the timing Tk or timing Tl set for the normal reach presentation, the timing Tm set for the super reach presentation, or the timing Tn set for the special reach presentation (see FIG. 77), and the execution timing of the character group presentation from these timings Tj, Tk, Tl, Tm, and Tn is determined by the value of the character group presentation timing determination counter.

In addition, in the character group performance timing selection table in the special reach performance pattern shown in FIG. , timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, or timing Tn. However, the distribution of the execution timings of the character group effects may be uneven, and the distribution of the execution timings may be different for each validity determination result. Further, in this embodiment, in the special reach effect pattern, the execution timing of the character group effect is distributed to timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, or timing Tn, but the character group effect is distributed to non-execution timing. may be set.

Here, FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B) are diagrams showing an example of a character group effect type selection table that is referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3904 to determine the effect content of the character group effect. Specifically, FIG. 84(A) is a diagram showing an example of a character group performance type selection table that is referred to when the performance pattern of the variable game is a super reach performance pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds. 84(C) is a diagram showing an example of a character group performance type selection table that is referred to when the performance pattern of the variable game is a special reach performance pattern with a variable display time of 90 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B), in the character group effect type selection table for each effect pattern, the value of the character group effect type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. Accordingly, the character group performance type is defined for each success/failure determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). In addition, in the character group performance type selection table for each performance pattern, if there is a distribution of character group performance non-execution, and the value of the character group performance type counter corresponds to the non-execution distribution, character group performance is not executed.

[Preview processing]
The preview performance process of this embodiment is a process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34, and executes a preview performance that is set when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of Fig. 72. Also, in the preview performance process of this embodiment, when a preview performance with overlapping preview content is scheduled to be executed, a process is executed to reset the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later. Here, Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the preview performance process of this embodiment.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
85, in the advance notice performance processing of this embodiment, the MPU 51 reads the value of a variable display counter that measures the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341 (step S4001), and judges whether or not it is the timing to execute the advance notice performance based on the value of this variable display counter and the execution timing of various advance notice performances stored in the advance notice content storage area set in the RAM 512 (step S4002). If it is the execution timing of the advance notice performance (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4003, and if it is not the execution timing of the advance notice performance (step S4002: No), the variable game processing is terminated.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
If it is the execution timing of a notice effect (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the notice effect corresponding to the execution timing (step S4003), and further sets the notice effect in the RAM 512 and updates it in step S4006, which will be described later. Refer to the preview performance execution history storage area in the resetting storage area to determine whether the preview performance execution history includes a preview performance that provides a preview with the same preview content as the preview content specified in step S4003. is determined (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance. Then, if the preview content in the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content in the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4007, and moves the process to step S4007. If the preview content in the preview performance does not overlap with the preview content in the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: No), the process moves to step S4005.

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
If the preview content of the preview performance to be executed this time does not overlap with the preview content of the preview performance executed previously (step S4004: No), that is, if the preview content of the preview performance to be executed this time is not yet previewed, the MPU 51 executes the preview performance to be executed this time (step S4005).Then, the MPU 51 updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store the preview performance executed this time (step S4006), and ends the preview performance processing.

<Step S4007>
If the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a preview performance resetting process (step S4007), The relevant notice performance process is ended.

[Preview effect resetting process]
In the preview performance resetting process of the present embodiment, processing is executed to reset the preview performance, etc., such as preview content different from the preview content in the previously executed preview performance. Here, FIGS. 86 to 89 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect resetting process.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 86, in the preview performance resetting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 performs the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time, specified in step S4003 in the preview performance process of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-continuation execution notice effect (see FIG. 75(A)) that only foretells that the execution will occur (step S4101). If the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo-continuous execution notice performance (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 moves to step S4102 for processing, and the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo-continuous execution notice performance. If not (step S4101: No), the process moves to step S4107.

<Step S4102>
If the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4102). Whether the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game can be judged, for example, based on the execution history of the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512, by whether there is an execution history of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance such as the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance in the variable game. If the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4103, and if the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is not the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4102: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4104.

<Step S4103>
If the pseudo-series corresponding to the current pseudo-series execution notice performance is the first pseudo-series in the variable game (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the red-speech performance (see FIG. 74(C)) has been executed in the variable game based on the execution history of the notice performance execution history memory area of the notice performance resetting memory area set in the RAM 512 (step S4102). Here, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the red-speech performance includes the red-speech 1 performance, the red-speech 2 performance, the red-speech 3 performance, the red-speech 4 performance, and the red-speech 5 performance, and the red-speech performance not only notifies the comprehensive type of the development performance, but also notifies that the pseudo-series will be executed. In other words, when the pseudo-series execution notice performance is a notice that the first pseudo-series will be executed, if the red-speech performance is executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-series execution notice performance, its execution can be restricted. Of course, the execution of the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect, which warns that a pseudo consecutive execution will be performed for the second or subsequent times, may be restricted.

Then, if the red dialogue effect has been executed in the variable game by the time the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect is executed (step S4103: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4106, and if the red dialogue effect has not been executed (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4104.

<Steps S4104 and S4105>
If the pseudo series corresponding to the current pseudo series execution notice performance is not the first pseudo series in the variable game (step S4102: No), or if the red line is not executed before the execution timing of the pseudo series execution notice performance in the variable game. If the performance has not been executed (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 executes the pseudo-continuation execution preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time (step S4104). Then, the MPU 51 updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance set in the RAM 512 to store that the pseudo-continuous execution preview performance has been executed (step S4105), and executes the relevant preview performance process. finish.

<Step S4106>
If the red serif performance that foretells the execution of the pseudo-association has already been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-association execution notice performance for the first pseudo-association in the relevant variable game (step S4103: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the execution of the relevant variable game. A pseudo-sequence notice effect corresponding to the total number of pseudo-sequences is executed (step S4106). Here, the total number of pseudo series in the variable game can be determined based on, for example, the total number of pseudo series stored in step S3602 in the pseudo series notice effect setting process of FIG. 78. In addition, the MPU 51 executes a pseudo series 2 notice performance as a pseudo series notice performance in place of the pseudo series execution notice performance when the total number of pseudo series is 2 (see FIG. 75(B)), When the number of consecutive times is 3, a pseudo consecutive 3 notice performance is executed instead of the pseudo consecutive execution notice performance (see Figure 75 (C)), and when the total number of pseudo consecutive runs is 4, a pseudo consecutive execution is performed. Instead of the preview performance, a pseudo-sequence 4 preview performance is executed (see FIG. 75(D)). Note that when the total number of pseudo series is one, the pseudo series execution preview performance (see FIG. 75(A)) is executed as the pseudo series preview performance without changing it. When the MPU 51 executes the pseudo-continuation preview performance, the MPU 51 updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance set in the RAM 512 to store that the pseudo-continuation execution preview performance has been executed ( Step S4105), the preview effect processing is ended.

In this way, when the preview performances for the execution of a pseudo series overlap, instead of the pseudo series execution preview performance, other pseudo series preview performances (Pseudo series 2 preview performance, pseudo series execution, etc.) according to the total number of pseudo series By executing the series 3 preview performance or the pseudo series 4 preview performance), the execution of the preview performance with duplicate preview content is prevented, and this is caused by the execution of the preview performance with duplicate preview content. It can suppress the feeling of boredom and disgust. In addition, since the other pseudo-sequence notice performance that is executed instead of the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is a performance that foretells the total number of pseudo-sequences, the player can Since the number of times can be grasped, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation (reliability) of a jackpot based on the total number of pseudo-runs.

Note that in this embodiment, the execution of the first pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is restricted, and the execution is changed to a pseudo-sequence notice performance that foretells the total number of pseudo-sequences, but the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is executed multiple times. In this case, the second and subsequent pseudo-coupling execution preview performance may be changed to a preview performance that includes content related to the pseudo-coupling as the preview content.

<Step S4107>
If the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is not a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time specified in step S4003 in the preview performance processing of Fig. 85 is related to the development performance (step S4107). Here, the preview content related to the development performance is the preview of the comprehensive type of the development performance, that is, the preview of whether the development performance is a normal reach performance, a super reach performance, or a special reach performance. Specifically, the MPU 51 judges whether the preview performance is a specific step-up performance (white background SU2 performance, white background SU3 performance, white background SU4 performance, red background SU1 performance, red background SU2 performance, red background SU3 performance) (see FIG. 74(B)), a specific dialogue performance (white dialogue 2 performance, white dialogue 3 performance, white dialogue 4 performance, red dialogue 1 performance, red dialogue 2 performance, red dialogue 3 performance, red dialogue 4 performance, red dialogue 5 performance) (see FIG. 74(C)), or a character group performance (see FIG. 74(D)). If the preview content in the preview performance is related to the development performance (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4108, and if the preview content in the preview performance is not related to the development performance (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4125 in FIG. 89.

<Step S4108>
If the contents of the notice in the notice performance scheduled to be executed this time are related to the development performance (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a development performance higher than the notice contents of the notice performance is scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance (step S4108). Here, in the comprehensive development performance, the special reach performance is the highest, the super reach performance is the middle, and the normal reach performance is the lowest. Therefore, for example, if the notice performance includes as a notice content that the normal reach performance will be executed, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the performance pattern in the variable game is a performance pattern (super reach performance pattern or special reach performance pattern) in which a super reach performance or a special reach performance higher than a normal reach performance is executed. Also, if the notice performance includes as a notice content that the super reach performance will be executed, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the performance pattern in the variable game is a special reach performance pattern in which a special reach performance higher than a super reach performance is executed. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a higher-level development performance is executed as a comprehensive development performance type, that is, whether it is possible to step up (upgrade) the preview content in the preview performance.

If the MPU 51 plans to execute a higher-level development performance as a more comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the preview performance (step S4108: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4109. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not plan to execute a higher-level development performance as a more comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the preview performance (step S4108: No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

In addition, if there is no plan to execute a higher-level development performance as a comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the preview performance, there may be a case where a performance pattern is set in which the reach performance of the preview content is executed as the final individual performance. Applicable. Specifically, if the preview content is that a normal reach effect will be executed and a normal reach effect pattern is set in the variable game, if the preview content is that a super reach effect will be executed, the variation This applies when a super reach performance pattern is set in a game, or when the preview content is that a special reach performance is to be executed and a special reach performance pattern is set in the variable game.

<Step S4109>
If a higher-level development performance is scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the preview performance (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a preview performance that notifies the execution of the higher-level development performance. For example, if the preview performance notifies the execution of a development performance one level higher than the preview content in the preview performance, that is, if the preview performance notifies the execution of a normal reach performance, the MPU 51 executes a preview performance (e.g., red background SU2 performance) that notifies the execution of a super reach performance, and if the preview performance notifies the execution of a super reach performance, the MPU 51 executes a preview performance (e.g., red background SU3 performance) that notifies the execution of a special reach performance. Then, when the MPU 51 executes a super reach preview performance or a special reach preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the super reach preview performance or the special reach preview performance has been executed (step S4105), and ends the preview performance processing.

In this way, when the advance presentation of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76(B)) overlaps as a comprehensive development performance type, a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed. By executing the preview presentation of the development of the event, it is possible to prevent the preview presentation of the duplicated notice content from being executed, and to reduce the feeling of boredom and disgust caused by the execution of the preview presentation of the duplicate notice content. The occurrence can be suppressed. In addition, by foretelling that a higher-level development production will be executed (by stepping up the preview content), reach production with higher expectations (confidence) of a jackpot. Since the player can know that the game will be executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game.

<Steps S4110 and S4111>
If a higher-level development performance than the predicted content of the prediction performance is not scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance (step S4108: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a prediction performance that predicts a specific development performance type of the development performance has already been executed (step S4110). Here, the prediction of the specific development performance type of the development performance is a prediction that details which development performance will be executed among the development performances of the same level (see FIG. 76 (B)). For example, when the normal reach performance corresponding to the comprehensive development performance includes the Warin reach performance, the Urin reach performance, the Marine reach performance, the Whale lucky reach performance, and the Sam reach performance, each of these Warin reach performance, the Urin reach performance, the Marine reach performance, the Whale lucky reach performance, and the Sam reach performance corresponds to a prediction of the execution of the Marine reach performance of the normal reach performance, which corresponds to a prediction of a specific development performance type.

Then, if the preview performance that foretells the specific development performance type of the development performance has been executed (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4112 of FIG. If the preview performance that foretells the specific development performance type has not been executed (step S4110: No), the preview performance that previews the specific type of development performance is executed (step S4111), and the preview performance resetting process ends.

In this way, when the advance presentation of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76(B)) as the comprehensive development performance type overlaps, the specific development performance type of the development performance is executed. By executing the development preview presentation, it is possible to prevent a preview presentation with duplicated preview content from being executed, and to create a feeling of boredom or disgust due to the execution of a preview presentation with duplicate preview content. can be suppressed.

By the way, in this embodiment, for example, the normal reach performance pattern includes normal performance patterns X1 to X5 (see FIG. 39(A)), but the normal reach performance executed as the final individual performance includes all normal performance patterns X1 to X5. It is not the same for X5, but multiple types are set, and the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is also different for each normal reach performance. For example, to explain a case where the normal reach performance includes the above-mentioned Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, Kujira key reach performance, and Sam reach performance, in normal performance pattern X1, the Warin reach performance is executed, and the normal performance In the pattern X2, a Urin reach performance is executed, in the normal performance pattern X3, a marine reach performance is performed, in the normal performance pattern X4, a whale key reach performance is performed, and in the normal performance pattern X5, a thumb reach performance is performed. In addition, among the Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, Kujira key reach performance, and Sam reach performance, for example, the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is higher in the order of Warin reach performance → Urin reach performance → Marine reach performance → Kujira key reach performance → Sam reach performance. Become.

Furthermore, the super reach performance pattern includes performance patterns Y1 to Y5 (see FIG. 39(B)), but the super reach performance executed as the final individual performance is not common to all performance patterns Y1 to Y5. There are multiple types, and the expectation level (reliability) of jackpots differs for each super reach performance. Furthermore, the special reach performance pattern includes performance patterns Z1 to Z5 (see FIG. 39(C)), but the special reach performance executed as the final individual performance is not common to all performance patterns Z1 to Z5. There are multiple types, and the expectation level (reliability) of jackpot is different for all special reach effects.

Therefore, from the player's perspective, which normal reach performance is executed in a normal reach performance, which super reach performance is executed in a super reach performance, and which special reach performance is executed in a special reach performance, This is a very important matter, and when a reach effect is executed, there is a lot of interest in what kind of reach effect will be executed. Therefore, in cases where it is not possible to step up (upgrade) the preview content as a comprehensive development production type, the specific development production type is used as the preview content instead of a preview production that uses this comprehensive development production type as the preview content. By executing the preview performance, the player can obtain information regarding the specific development performance type to be executed in the variable game, so the jackpot expectation level (reliability) can be estimated based on the specific development performance type. You can enjoy the progress of the game by doing things like

In this embodiment, when the step-up (superiorization) of the forecast contents as the comprehensive development performance type is not possible, the specific development performance type is forecast. In this case, there is a concern that the level of the final individual performance will be easily grasped by the player at the stage when the specific development performance type is forecast. For example, if the execution of a normal reach performance is forecast first, and then the forecast of the specific development performance type of the normal reach performance is executed, it will be understood that the variable game will not develop into a super reach performance or a special reach performance, but will end with a normal reach performance. And when it is understood that it will not develop into a super reach performance or a special reach performance, it will be understood that the expectation of a big win is low, and the interest in the progress of the variable game will decrease. Therefore, even when the step-up (superiorization) of the forecast contents as the comprehensive development performance type is possible, it is also possible to make the forecast of the specific development performance type possible. In this way, even when the step-up (superiorization) of the forecast contents as the comprehensive development performance type is possible, by making the forecast of the specific development performance type possible, it becomes difficult to grasp the level of the reach performance that will finally be executed. This makes it difficult to understand the likelihood (reliability) of a jackpot, which helps prevent a decline in interest in the progress of the variable game.

<Step S4112>
If the preview performance that foretells the specific development performance type of the development performance has already been executed (step S4110: Yes), that is, if the preview content cannot be detailed, the MPU 51 displays the variation display (the variation symbol) for the variation game. ) is set (step S4112). Here, the pending display change of the variable display for the variable game means, for example, that the variable display displayed alongside the pending display (the pending symbol) for the reservation of the right to execute the variable game changes. The variable display and pending display will be explained with reference to FIG. 75(A). The four small circle images displayed at the bottom of the screen are the pending display, and the large circle image to the left of the small circle images is the variable display. It is.

By the way, the variable display and the pending display suggest the degree of expectation (reliability) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, for example, by color or pattern. In one example, the fluctuation display and pending display change in stages, such as default display → blue display (blue pending) → green display (green pending) → red display (red pending) → jackpot confirmed display, etc. The higher the stage, the higher the expectation level (confidence) of hitting the jackpot. Further, the final stage and timing of the fluctuating display and the pending display change are set, for example, at the time of the jackpot lottery or when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, and the pending display change can be executed both during the pending display and the fluctuating display. Note that although the fluctuation display is not a pending display, changes in the fluctuation display are also included in pending changes.

In step S4112, the MPU 51 determines whether a pending change of the variable display is set in the variable play, thereby determining whether a pending change of the variable display is possible. If a pending change of the variable display is set in the variable play (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4113, and if a pending change of the variable display is not set in the variable play (step S4112: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4115.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
If the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the variable display to the set final stage instead of the advance notice performance (step S4113). Then, the MPU 51 clears the pending change setting for the variable display (step S4114) and ends the advance notice performance resetting process.

In this way, when the advance presentation of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76(B)) overlaps as a comprehensive development performance type, a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed. If the advance notice (step-up) cannot be made and the advance notice that a specific development effect is to be executed is given, the variable display for the variable game is suspended and changed until the final stage. That is, if there is no content that can be previewed regarding the development performance in the variable game, a pending change to the variable display that is unrelated to the development performance in the variable game is executed instead of the preview performance regarding the development performance. In the case where the advance notice effects of the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) are executed as the comprehensive development effect type, the suspended change for the variation display is executed, so that the change in the variation game is Even if there is no content that can be previewed regarding the development performance, the execution of a preview performance with duplicate preview content is prevented, and the feeling of boredom or disgust caused by the execution of a preview performance with duplicate preview content is prevented. can suppress the occurrence of In addition, by changing the development notice performance to a pending change in the final stage of the fluctuating display, the player can realize that the fluctuating display is changing and that the final stage can be changed at an early stage, that is, at a high speed before the reach performance is executed. This can be known at the stage of variable performance. As a result, the player can obtain information for estimating the degree of jackpot expectation (reliability) in the fluctuation at an early stage after the start of the fluctuation game, so the player can proceed with the game while anticipating the progress of the subsequent game. You can enjoy it.

<Step S4115>
If the reserved change of the variable display is not set in the variable game (step S4112: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot or not (step S4115). Whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot or not can be judged based on whether the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R certain jackpot flag, 16R certain jackpot flag) that can be set to ON in step S2103 when a variable pattern command is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 72 is ON or not. Then, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4116, and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a jackpot (step S4115: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4119.

<Steps S4116 to S4119>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a lottery to execute the preview performance with a high probability of winning (step S4116). Here, the high winning probability in the execution lottery of the preview performance is the probability compared with the low winning probability in step S4119 described later, and this high winning probability is set, for example, from a range of 10% or more and less than 100%, It is preferably set within a range of 30% or more and 90% or less, more preferably set within a range of 50% or more and 80% or less.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a jackpot (step S4115: No), the MPU 51 performs a lottery to execute the preview performance with a low probability of winning (step S4117). Here, the low winning probability in the execution lottery of the preview performance is a probability lower than the high winning probability in step S4116 described above, and is set, for example, in the range of 0% to 50%, preferably 5% to 40%. It is set from the following range, more preferably from 10% to 30%. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery for executing the preview performance has been won (step S4118). If the MPU 51 wins the lottery for executing the preview performance (step S4118: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the preview performance without changing it (step S4119), and proceeds to step S4105 in FIG. The preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance is updated to store that the preview performance has been executed, and the preview performance process is ended. On the other hand, if the lottery for executing the preview performance is not won (step S4118: No), the process moves to step S4120 in FIG. 88.

In this way, when the advance presentation of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76(B)) overlaps as a comprehensive development performance type, a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed. If it is not possible to advance notice (step up) and a notice is given that a specific development performance will be executed, the execution lottery will determine whether or not the advance notice performance will be executed. If there is no such notice, execution of the notice performance is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of preview effects with duplicated preview contents, and to suppress the feeling of boredom or disgust caused by the execution of preview effects with duplicate preview contents. In addition, by changing the development notice performance to a pending change in the final stage of the fluctuating display, the player can realize that the fluctuating display is changing and that the final stage can be changed at an early stage, that is, at a high speed before the reach performance is executed. This can be known at the stage of variable production. As a result, the player can obtain information for estimating the degree of jackpot expectation (reliability) in the fluctuation at an early stage after the start of the fluctuation game, so the player can proceed with the game while anticipating the progress of the subsequent game. You can enjoy it.

In addition, the winning probability of the actual lottery when the lottery result is a jackpot is higher than the winning probability when the lottery result is a miss, so that the same level of development performance ( 76(B))) is more likely to overlap. As a result, in the case of a jackpot, if the preview effects of the same level of development effects overlap, the expectation level (reliability) of the lottery result being a jackpot is increased, and the preview effect increases. Since the player's interest in the game can be increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Step S4120>
If the lottery for executing the advance notice performance is not won (step S4118: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S4120). Whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved can be judged based on the first reservation and the second reservation that are updated when the first reservation command or the second reservation command is received, for example. Then, if the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S4120: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4121, and if the right to execute the variable game is not reserved (step S4120: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4124.

<Step S4121>
If there is a reservation for the right to execute a variable play (step S4120: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not there is a reservation change setting for the variable play after the variable play. If there is a reservation change setting for the reservation display for the variable play after the variable play (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4122, and if there is no reservation change setting for the reservation display for the variable play after the variable play (step S4121: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4124.

<Steps S4122 and S4123>
If there is a setting for a pending change in the pending display for the variable game after the variable game (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to a pending display for the variable game after the variable game in place of the preview performance. The change is held until the final stage (step S4122). In addition, when the setting of the reservation change for the reservation display for the variable game after the said variable game is set for a plurality of reservations, the reservation change for the reservation display for the reservation in which the variable game is executed first is executed. Then, the MPU 51 clears the hold change setting for the hold that has been changed to hold (step S4123), and ends the notice effect resetting process.

In this way, when there are overlapping preview effects of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76 (B)) as a comprehensive development performance type, it is not possible to make a preview (step up) of a higher level development performance than the relevant development performance, and if a preview is made of a specific development performance, a performance related to the next or subsequent variation that is unrelated to the relevant variable play, that is, a change in the hold display for the hold from the next or subsequent variation, is executed. As a result, even if it is not possible to step up or detail the preview content of the preview performance, the execution of the preview performance is restricted, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, by executing the change in the hold display for the hold after the next change in the relevant variable game, the player can experience the change in hold for the game after the next change earlier than planned. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating further changes to the hold display for the hold display that has been changed to a hold, and is also able to enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a jackpot. Ru.

<Step S4124>
If there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S4120: No), or if there is no setting for a change in the reservation display for the variable games after the variable game (step S4121: No), the MPU 51 executes the corresponding preview performance. Instead, a game explanation performance is executed (step S4124), and the preview performance resetting process is ended. Here, the game explanation performance includes, for example, a performance that explains a game method during a jackpot game, a jackpot probability, and various game settings such as a volume adjustment method and a character selection method.

In this way, when there are overlapping preview performances of the same level of comprehensive development performance type (see FIG. 76(B)), if a preview (step-up) of a higher level development performance than the preview performance cannot be made, and a preview of a specific development performance is made, a performance unrelated to the variable game, i.e., a game explanation, is executed. As a result, even if the preview content of the preview performance cannot be stepped up or detailed, the execution of the preview performance is restricted, and the execution of a preview performance with the same preview content is avoided, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and preventing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, by having the game explanation executed, the player can obtain information about the game, which increases his/her knowledge of the game.

<Step S4125>
If the preview content in the preview performance is not related to the development performance (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the preview content in the preview performance is a big win or not. If the preview content in the preview performance is a big win (step S4125: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4126, and if the preview content in the preview performance is not a big win (step S4125: No), the preview performance reset process is terminated.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
If the preview content in the preview performance is a jackpot (step S4125: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a variable jackpot (step S4126). Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot is determined by whether the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, which can be set to ON in step S2103 when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 72, is turned on. It can be judged based on whether or not.

Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probability-variable jackpot (step S4126: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a probability-variable jackpot preview performance (step S4127), moves to step S4105 of FIG. The preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance is updated to store that the definite change preview performance has been executed, and the relevant preview performance process is ended.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a probability variable jackpot (step S4126: No), that is, if the lottery result is a (5R) normal jackpot, the process moves to step S4117 in FIG. 87. In other words, if the preview content of the preview performance is a jackpot, and the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, a lottery will be held to execute the preview performance with a low probability of winning, and if you win the lottery, you will win the jackpot. The preview performance is executed to foretell that the event will occur, and if the execution lottery is not selected, the preview performance is not executed.

In this way, when there are overlapping preview effects that predict that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, if the lottery result is a probability jackpot, a preview effect with the preview content stepped up or detailed to the probability jackpot preview is executed instead of the jackpot preview, and if the lottery result is a normal jackpot, whether to execute the preview effect is determined by a lottery with a low probability of winning. When there are overlapping preview effects that predict that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, if the lottery result is a probability jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the preview content is stepped up or detailed, thereby avoiding the execution of a preview effect with the same preview content, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and preventing a decrease in the interest of the game, and since the player can know that it is a probability jackpot, he or she can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, which is less advantageous to the player than a probability jackpot, the execution of the preview effect that is executed later, including the same preview content, is determined by a lottery. Therefore, the execution of subsequent preview effects that contain the same preview content is limited by a certain probability, and even if the preview effect is executed as a result of winning a lottery, the player can enjoy the gameplay with peace of mind while knowing that it is a big win, improving gameplay.

In addition, if there is a duplicate of a preview performance that foretells that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, if it is a guaranteed jackpot, the preview performance that is scheduled to be executed later will be executed without drawing, but if it is a guaranteed jackpot However, whether or not to execute the preview performance may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is conceivable to set the winning rate in the execution lottery of the preview performance in the case of a probability variable jackpot to be higher than that in the case of a normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the preview performance that is scheduled to be executed later is executed without relying on a lottery.
Further, the winning rate in the execution lottery of the preview performance may be set to be the same for the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, and may be set higher for the normal jackpot than for the probability variable jackpot.

In addition, if a preview performance that includes a guaranteed variable jackpot as the preview content is executed, and if the preview content of the subsequent preview performance is a guaranteed variable jackpot, the preview content may be changed. Instead, a later preview performance will be performed. In a probability-variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a preview performance including the same preview content is executed. Therefore, each time a preview performance that includes preview content that is favorable to the player is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind while confirming that it will be an advantageous guaranteed jackpot, which improves the gameplay. Ru.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a preview performance including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later is restricted in various ways, for example, by stepping up (raising the preview content) or making it more detailed, changing the preview content, or executing a performance unrelated to the variable play. In this way, by restricting the execution of a preview performance to be executed later when a preview performance including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of a preview performance with the same preview content in one variable play is suppressed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the preview performance to be executed later. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by preview performances with the same preview content being executed multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the preview effect containing the same preview content is for the first pseudo-consecutive win, the pseudo-consecutive win execution preview effect is changed to an effect that predicts the total number of pseudo-consecutive wins. This allows the player to know the total number of pseudo-consecutive wins before the first pseudo-consecutive win is executed, and the player can enjoy the progress of the game by, for example, guessing the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot based on the total number of pseudo-consecutive wins.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the preview performance including the same preview content is related to a development performance, a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed, or a preview performance with a specific development performance type as the preview content is executed. By executing a development preview performance indicating that a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed, it is possible to know that a reach performance with a higher expectation (reliability) of a jackpot will be executed by notifying that a higher level development performance will be executed (by stepping up (upgrading) the preview content), and therefore it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game. In addition, by executing a preview performance with a specific development performance type as the preview content, it is possible to limit the execution of a preview performance to be executed later even if the preview content cannot be stepped up (upgraded) as a comprehensive development performance type, and the player can obtain information regarding the specific development performance type executed in the variable game, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot based on the specific development performance type.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the preview performance including the same preview content is related to a jackpot, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability jackpot, the jackpot preview performance is executed as a probability jackpot preview performance, and if the result of the lottery is a normal jackpot, whether to execute the preview performance is determined by a lottery with a low probability of winning. As a result, if the probability jackpot is favorable to the player, the probability jackpot preview performance is executed, and the execution of the preview performance with the same preview content is avoided, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. Since the player can know that it is a probability jackpot, he or she can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, which is less favorable to the player than a probability jackpot, the execution of the preview performance that is executed later including the same preview content is determined by a lottery. Therefore, the execution of the preview performance that is executed later including the same preview content is limited with a certain probability, and even if the preview performance is executed by winning the lottery, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind while confirming that it is a jackpot, improving the playability.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a preview performance including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed and a specified condition is met, the preview performance to be executed later is restricted from being executed as set in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 73), and the preview performance to be executed later is changed to another preview performance, etc., but instead of restricting the preview performance to be executed later from being executed as set in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 73), the preview performance to be executed later may be executed with at least some aspects (e.g., color, pattern, etc.) changed from the contents set in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 73). In this way, by executing the preview performance to be executed later with at least some aspects (e.g., color, pattern, etc.) changed from the contents set in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 73), it is possible to avoid the preview performance to be executed later from being executed as decided, for example, when the specified condition is not met.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the same preview performance is not set in the same variable game (see FIGS. 80, 82, 84, 80, etc.), the same preview performance is set multiple times in the same variable game. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, to the extent applicable, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to fifth embodiments described above.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, a case was explained in which, in this embodiment, when a preview performance including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the preview performance scheduled to be executed later is restricted by various methods at the timing of execution of the preview performance, for example, by stepping up (upgrading) or detailing the preview content, changing the preview content, or executing a performance unrelated to the variable game.

However, if the execution of a preview performance that is scheduled to be executed later is restricted at the execution timing of the preview performance, the executed preview performance is memorized every time the preview performance is executed. In addition, each time you try to execute a preview effect, it is determined whether a preview effect that includes the same preview content has been executed in the past, and if a preview effect that includes the same preview content has been executed in the past, , it is necessary to limit the preview performance in light of events that will occur in the future in the variable game. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment described above, the control burden during execution of the variable game increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when setting the preview performance, the preview performance is determined so that a preview performance containing the same preview content is not set. In this way, when setting the preview performance, the preview performance is determined so that a preview performance containing the same preview content is not set, so that there is no need to store the preview performance that has already been performed each time a preview performance is performed, and there is no need to determine whether a preview performance containing the same preview content has been performed in the past each time a preview performance is to be performed, nor is there a need to limit a preview performance to be performed later in light of an event that will occur in the future in the variable play. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to limit the execution of preview performances containing the same preview content while reducing the control burden during the execution of the variable play, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by preview performances with the same preview content being executed multiple times is prevented.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 90 to 92.

[Preview performance setting process]
Here, Fig. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice performance setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 90, the notice performance setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of this embodiment is basically the same as the notice performance setting process of the sixth embodiment described above, but differs from the sixth embodiment in that a notice performance reset process (step S4201) is executed.

[Preview performance reset processing]
In the preview performance resetting process of this embodiment, when the preview performances set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the preview performance setting process of Fig. 90 include preview performances including the same preview content, the preview performances are reset so that preview performances including the same preview content are not set. Here, Figs. 91 and 92 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the preview performance resetting process of this embodiment.

<Steps S4301 and S4302>
As shown in FIG. 91, in the preview effect resetting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 reads out the preview effects set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the preview effect setting process of FIG. 90 (step S4301), and sets these preview effects. It is determined whether or not there is a preview effect whose preview contents overlap (step S4302). If there is a preview performance with overlapping preview content among the preview performances (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4303, and if there is no preview performance with duplicate preview content among the preview performances. (Step S4302: No), the preview effect resetting process is ended.

<Step S4303>
If there is a preview performance whose preview content overlaps among the preview performances (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the overlapped preview content is related to a pseudo connection (step S4303). The MPU 51 moves the process to step S4304 when the duplicate notice content is related to pseudo-association (step S4303: Yes), and shifts the process to step S4307 when the duplicate notice content is not related to pseudo-association (step S4303: No). to move to.

<Step S4304>
If the overlapping preview contents are related to pseudo consecutive wins (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance is executed after the pseudo consecutive win related preview performance other than the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance among the preview performances in which the overlapping preview contents are related to pseudo consecutive wins (step S4304). If the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance is executed after the pseudo consecutive win related preview performance other than the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance (step S4304: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4305, and if the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance is executed before the pseudo consecutive win related preview performance other than the pseudo consecutive win execution preview performance (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4307.

<Steps S4305 and S4306>
If the pseudo-continuation execution notice performance is executed after the pseudo-continuation-related notice performance other than the pseudo-continuation execution notice performance (step S4304: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the total number of pseudo-continuations in the variable game (step S4304: Yes). S4305), the first pseudo-continuation execution notice performance is reset to the pseudo-continuation notice performance corresponding to the total number of pseudo-continuations in the variable game (step S4106).

Here, the total number of pseudo series in the variable game can be determined, for example, based on the total number of pseudo series stored in step S3602 in the pseudo series notice performance setting process of FIG. 78. In addition, the MPU 51 resets the pseudo series 2 preview performance (see FIG. 75(B)) instead of the pseudo series execution notice performance when the total number of pseudo series is 2, as the pseudo series preview performance. If the number of pseudo consecutive runs is 3, the pseudo consecutive execution notice performance is replaced by a pseudo consecutive 3 notice performance (see Figure 75 (C)), and if the total number of pseudo consecutive runs is 4, the pseudo consecutive execution notice performance is reset. Instead of the continuous execution preview performance, a pseudo continuous 4 preview performance (see FIG. 75(D)) is set again. Note that if the total number of pseudo-sequences is one, there is no need to reset the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance (see Figure 75 (A)) as the pseudo-sequence notice performance, and it is not necessary to reset the pseudo-series execution notice performance (see Figure 75 (A)), It may be reset to an execution notice performance.

In this way, when the preview performances for the execution of a pseudo series overlap, instead of the first pseudo series execution preview performance, another pseudo series preview performance (pseudo series 2 preview) according to the total number of pseudo series executions is performed. By resetting the performance, Pseudo Series 3 Preview Performance, or Pseudo Series 4 Preview Performance), a preview performance with duplicated preview content is prevented from being executed, and a preview performance with duplicated preview content is executed. It is possible to suppress the feeling of boredom and disgust caused by this. In addition, since the other pseudo-sequence notice performance that is reset instead of the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is a performance that foretells the total number of pseudo-sequences, the player can Since the number of consecutive runs can be ascertained, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation (reliability) of a jackpot based on the total number of pseudo consecutive runs.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the first pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is restricted and is reset to the pseudo-sequence notice performance that foretells the total number of pseudo-sequences, but the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is executed multiple times. In this case, the second and subsequent pseudo-series execution preview performance may be reset to a preview performance that includes content related to the pseudo-sequence as the preview content, or the first preview performance to be executed may be reset.

<Step S4307>
If the overlapping notice content is not related to pseudo-association (Step S4303: No), if the pseudo-association execution notice performance is executed before any pseudo-association-related notice performance other than the pseudo-association execution notice performance (Step S4304: No) , or when the pseudo-continuation preview performance is reset (step S4106), the MPU 51 determines whether the duplicated preview content is related to the development performance (step S4307). Here, the preview content related to the development performance is one that foretells the comprehensive type of the development performance, that is, the content that foretells whether the development performance is a normal reach performance, a super reach performance, or a special reach performance. Determine whether or not. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the preview performance is a specific step-up performance among the step-up performances (white background SU2 performance, white background SU3 performance, white background SU4 performance, red background SU1 performance, red background SU2 performance, red background SU3 production) (see Figure 74(B)), specific dialogue productions among the dialogue productions (white serif 2 production, white serif 3 production, white serif 4 production, red serif 1 production, red serif 2 production, red It is determined whether it is one of the dialogue 3 performance, red dialogue 4 performance, red dialogue 5 performance (see FIG. 74(C)), and character group performance (see FIG. 74(D)). Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4308 when the duplicate preview content is related to a development performance (step S4307: Yes), and moves the process to step S4308 when the duplicate preview content is not related to a development performance (step S4307: No). The process moves to step S4312 in FIG. 92.

<Step S4308>
If the overlapping notice contents are related to the development performance (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a higher-ranked development performance is scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance than the notice contents in the notice performance (step S4109). Here, in the comprehensive development performance, the special reach performance is the highest, the super reach performance is the middle, and the normal reach performance is the lowest. Therefore, for example, if the notice performance includes as a notice content that the normal reach performance will be executed, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the performance pattern in the variable game is a performance pattern (super reach performance pattern or special reach performance pattern) in which a super reach performance or a special reach performance higher than a normal reach performance is executed. Also, if the notice performance includes as a notice content that the super reach performance will be executed, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the performance pattern in the variable game is a special reach performance pattern in which a special reach performance higher than a super reach performance is executed. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a higher-level development performance is executed as a comprehensive development performance type, that is, whether it is possible to step up (upgrade) the preview content in the preview performance.

Then, if the MPU 51 is planning to execute a higher-level development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the preview effect (step S4309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4310. On the other hand, if it is not scheduled to execute a higher-order development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the preview effect (step S4309: No), the process moves to step S4311.

In addition, cases where a more comprehensive development effect than the predicted content of the preview effect is not planned to be executed include cases where a presentation pattern is set in which the reach effect of the predicted content is executed as the final individual effect. Specifically, this applies when the predicted content is that a normal reach effect will be executed and a normal reach presentation pattern is set in the variable game, when the predicted content is that a super reach effect will be executed and a super reach presentation pattern is set in the variable game, and when the predicted content is that a special reach effect will be executed and a special reach presentation pattern is set in the variable game.

<Step S4310>
If a higher-level development effect is scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the relevant preview effect (step S4309: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the last of the preview effects in which the overlapping preview content is related to the development effect. The preview performance to be executed is reset to the preview performance that foretells that a higher-level development performance will be executed. For example, the MPU 51 foretells that a development performance that is one level higher than the preview content of the last preview performance will be executed, that is, the last preview performance will be a normal reach performance. If this is the case, the preview effect (for example, red background SU2 effect) that foretells that the super reach effect will be executed is reset, and if the preview effect is one that foretells that the super reach effect will be executed, is reset to a preview performance (for example, a red background SU3 performance) that foretells that the special reach performance will be executed.

In this way, when the advance presentation of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76(B)) overlaps as a comprehensive development performance type, a development performance of a higher level than the development performance is executed. By resetting to the development preview performance of the event, the execution of the preview performance with duplicated preview content is prevented, and the feeling of boredom and disgust caused by the execution of the preview performance with duplicate preview content is prevented. can suppress the occurrence of In addition, by foretelling that a higher-level development production will be executed (by stepping up the preview content), reach production with higher expectations (confidence) of a jackpot. Since the player can know that the game will be executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the preview performance that is executed last among the preview performances in which overlapping preview content is related to the development performance is reset, but if there is overlap in the preview content of three or more preview performances, the two or more preview performances with overlapping preview content may be reset, or the preview performance that is executed first may be reset.

<Step S4311>
If a higher-ranking development effect is not scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the relevant preview effect (step S4309: No), the MPU 51 executes the overlapping preview content at the end of the preview effects related to the development effect. The preview performance to be executed is reset to a preview performance that foretells the specific type of development performance.

Here, the preview of the specific type of development performance of the development performance is a notice detailing which development performance will be executed among the development performances at the same level (see FIG. 76(B)). For example, if the normal reach performances that fall under the comprehensive development performance include Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, Kujirachi reach performance, and Sam reach performance, these Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, and Kujirachi Each of the reach performance and the thumb reach performance corresponds to a concrete development performance, and the fact that the marine reach performance of the normal reach performance is announced to be executed corresponds to a notice of the concrete development performance type.

In this way, when there are overlapping preview performances of the same level of development performance (see FIG. 76 (B)) as comprehensive development performance types, the preview performance is reset to a development preview performance of a specific development performance type of the development performance, thereby preventing the preview performance of the overlapping preview content from being executed, and suppressing the occurrence of boredom or disgust caused by the execution of a preview performance of the overlapping preview content. In addition, by resetting the specific development performance type to a preview performance with the preview content, the player can obtain information regarding the specific development performance type executed in the variable game, and can enjoy the progress of the game by, for example, guessing the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot based on the specific development performance type.

<Step S4312>
If the overlapping notice contents are not related to the development performance (step S4307: No), as shown in Fig. 91, the MPU 51 judges whether the overlapping notice contents are related to the big win (step S4312). If the overlapping notice contents are related to the big win (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4313, and if the overlapping notice contents are not related to the big win (step S4312: No), the MPU 51 ends the notice performance reset process.

<Steps S4313 to S4315>
If the overlapping notice contents are related to a jackpot (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot with a high probability of winning (step S4313). Whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot with a high probability of winning can be judged based on whether the 5R high probability of winning flag or the 16R high probability of winning flag, which can be set to ON in step S2103 when a variable pattern command is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 72, is ON.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a guaranteed jackpot (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 resets the preview performance that is executed last among the preview performances whose overlapping preview contents are jackpots to a preview performance whose preview contents are guaranteed jackpots (step S4314), and ends the preview performance processing.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a guaranteed jackpot (step S4313: No), i.e., if the result of the lottery is a (5R) normal jackpot, the last preview performance among the preview performances whose overlapping preview contents are jackpots is cleared, and the preview performance process is terminated.

In this way, if the preview effect that foretells that the lottery result is a jackpot in a jackpot lottery is duplicated, and if the lottery result is a guaranteed-variable jackpot, the preview content will be stepped up to a guaranteed-variable jackpot notice instead of the jackpot lottery. Alternatively, the setting is reset to a detailed preview performance, and if the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the setting of the preview performance is cleared. This prevents the execution of preview performances with the same preview content, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and thereby preventing the game from becoming less interesting. In addition, when the lottery result is a guaranteed and variable jackpot, the preview effect that includes the guaranteed and variable jackpot as the preview content is reset, so that the player can know that it is a guaranteed and variable jackpot, so he can enjoy the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the preview performance that is executed last among the preview performances in which the overlapping preview contents are a jackpot is reset, but if there is overlap in the preview contents of three or more preview performances, the two or more preview performances with overlapping preview contents may be reset, or the preview performance that is executed first may be reset.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting the preview performance, the preview performance is determined so that a preview performance containing the same preview content is not set. In this way, when setting the preview performance, the preview performance is determined so that a preview performance containing the same preview content is not set, so that there is no need to store the preview performance that has already been performed each time a preview performance is performed, and there is no need to determine whether a preview performance containing the same preview content has been performed in the past each time a preview performance is to be performed, nor is there a need to limit preview performances to be performed later in light of events that will occur in the future in the variable play. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to limit the execution of preview performances containing the same preview content while reducing the control burden during the execution of the variable play, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by preview performances with the same preview content being executed multiple times is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, in this embodiment, when a preview effect including the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the execution timing of the preview effect that is scheduled to be executed later is the execution timing of the preview effect. We have explained various methods, such as stepping up (higher ranking) or making more detailed (concrete) the contents of the preview, changing the contents of the preview, and the case where restrictions are imposed by executing performances unrelated to the variable game. In the above-described sixth embodiment, a decrease in interest in the game due to repeated execution of preview effects with the same preview content is prevented.

However, it is expected that some players will not notice that the same preview content has been executed multiple times, and in that case, they may not notice that the preview content has been stepped up (upgraded) or detailed (specified) to something more advantageous to them when the preview content overlaps, i.e., they will not notice that advantageous information has been provided to the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the contents of the notice in the notice performance to be executed later are executed without change, and the performance information (additional information) that was not notified (announced) in the notice content to be executed earlier is presented to the player. In this way, the notice contents in the notice performance to be executed later are executed without change, and the performance information (additional information) that was not notified (announced) in the notice content to be executed earlier is presented to the player, so that in addition to the information grasped from the notice performance, additional information different from this information can be obtained at the same time. Therefore, the presentation of the additional information changes the focus, and the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction and a sense of gain from obtaining the additional information. This reduces the discomfort of, for example, a notice performance with the same notice content being executed, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, even if the player does not notice that notice performances with the same notice content have been executed twice or the player has little knowledge of the gaming machine, the additional information presented in addition makes it easy to understand that information different from the notice performance has been presented. Based on the additional information, it becomes possible to specify, for example, the contents of the variable game performance that will occur later in the variable game or the reserved game after the variable game, or the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when a preview performance with the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, additional information that is different from the preview content in a subsequent preview performance may only be presented if a predetermined condition is met. preferable. The predetermined condition in this case is that in the sixth embodiment described above, when a preview performance with the same preview content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of a later preview performance is restricted (the preview content is changed). ) is the same as the predetermined condition. In this way, by setting a predetermined condition for presenting additional information that is different from the preview content in the preview performance that will be executed later, the frequency of presentation of the additional information can be adjusted depending on how the predetermined condition is set. becomes possible. As a result, for example, by setting a predetermined condition to reduce the frequency of presentation of additional information, it is possible to give premium quality to the additional information, thereby improving the gameplay.

The additional information may be future events occurring in the variable game, particularly unannounced future events, and is preferably information that is more advantageous to the player than the contents of the announcement in the later announcement performance. The future events occurring in this embodiment are the same as the future events occurring in the sixth embodiment described above. In this way, when an announcement performance with the same announcement content is scheduled to be executed, the additional information for the later announcement performance is an (unannounced) future event, making it possible to recognize in advance the events that will occur in the variable game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the variable game while taking into consideration the future events recognized from the additional information. In addition, by providing information that is more advantageous to the player than the contents of the announcement in the later announcement performance, a game feature is provided in which the player can obtain advantageous additional information when the announcement contents overlap.

In addition, the (unannounced) future occurrence event is, for example, related to a variable game presentation executed in the variable game, and in this case, the additional information is preferably related to the variable game presentation. In this way, since the (unannounced) future occurrence event (additional information) is related to a variable game presentation executed in the variable game, it becomes possible to recognize or identify a part of a variable game presentation that will occur in the variable game in the future. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will result in the execution of a jackpot game from the part of the variable game presentation grasped from the additional information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, similar to the sixth embodiment described above, things related to the variable game performance executed in the variable game include, for example, the execution of a pseudo continuous performance, the execution of an advanced performance, and the execution of a jackpot lottery. These include the execution of a performance that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot, and the occurrence of a pending display change in the variable display for the variable game.

In addition, if the (unannounced) future occurrence event is related to a variable game effect to be executed in the variable game, the additional information may be, for example, the same type or similar type of preview content as the preview content in the preview effect to be executed later. In this case, the same type or system of preview content as the preview content in the preview performance to be executed later is also the same as in the sixth embodiment described above.

The additional information may also be content unrelated to the variable play, and in this case, the unrelated content may be, for example, information regarding the reservation of the right to play the variable play after the next variation. Specifically, the additional information may be, for example, a notice of a change in the reservation display in response to the reservation of the right, or a notification that the reserved rights include a jackpot lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by the additional information being content unrelated to the variable play, it becomes possible to present the additional information even if there is no future event occurring in the variable play that can be presented as additional information.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the content of the preview in the preview performance to be executed later is not changed, but the manner in which the preview performance is determined (the preview performance to be executed first) is not changed. It is also conceivable that the process may be executed in a manner (different manner) that is distinguishable from the manner (aspect). Here, as an identifiable aspect, it is conceivable that, for example, the manner in which the preview performance is determined (the manner of the preview performance to be executed first) is different from a part of the performance (display). Specifically, examples include differences in color, pattern, background, etc., and addition of effects. In this way, by executing the preview performance in a manner that is distinguishable (a different format) from the determined format (the format of the preview performance executed first), the player's attention to the preview performance is drawn, By creating a sense of discomfort, it becomes possible to draw attention to the preview performance and, by extension, to the image display means (design display section). This makes it easier for the player to understand that additional information is being presented.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 99, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

[Preview production processing]
Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the preview effect setting process of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the preview effect setting process of this embodiment is basically the same as the preview effect setting process of the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 85), but the preview effect resetting process is This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment described above in that additional information display setting processing is executed instead. Further, the preview effect processing of this embodiment differs from the above-described sixth embodiment in that the preview effect scheduled to be executed is executed in a changed manner when additional information is displayed.

<Step S4401>
As shown in Fig. 93, in the preview performance setting process of this embodiment, if the preview content of the preview performance to be executed this time does not overlap with the preview content of the preview performance executed previously (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 executes the preview performance to be executed this time (step S4401). That is, if the preview content of the preview performance to be executed this time is not yet previewed, the preview performance to be executed this time is executed in the preview performance mode (first mode) set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the preview performance setting process of Fig. 73 (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store the preview performance executed this time (step S4006), and ends the preview performance process.

<Step S4402>
On the other hand, if the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 executes additional information display setting processing (step S4402). ). Note that the additional information display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. Then, the MPU 51 updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store the currently executed preview performance (step S4006), and ends the preview performance process.

[Additional information display setting process]
In the additional information display setting process of this embodiment, if the preview effects set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the preview effect setting process in FIG. In addition to being executed in a different manner, additional information is displayed while the preview performance is being executed. Here, FIGS. 94 and 95 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the additional information display setting process of this embodiment.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 94, in the additional information display setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines that the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time, specified in step S4003 in the preview performance process of FIG. It is determined whether or not this is a pseudo-continuation execution notice performance that only foretells that a certain event will occur (step S4501). The pseudo-continuation execution preview effect of this embodiment is executed by displaying an image showing a character saying "one more time", for example, as shown in FIG. 96(A). Then, if the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo-continuous execution notice performance (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 moves to step S4502 for processing, and the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo-continuous execution notice performance. If it is not a preview performance (step S4501: No), the process moves to step S4506.

<Step S4502>
If the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4502). Whether the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game can be judged, for example, based on the execution history of the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512, by whether there is an execution history of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance such as the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance in the variable game. If the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4503, and if the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance corresponding to this pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is not the first pseudo consecutive execution in the variable game (step S4502: No), the process shifts to step S4514 in FIG. 95.

<Step S4503>
If the pseudo series corresponding to the current pseudo series execution preview performance is the first pseudo series in the variable game (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 for advance notice. Based on the execution history in the performance execution history storage area, it is determined whether the red line performance (see FIG. 74(C)) has been executed in the variable game (step S4502). Here, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the red serif production includes red serif 1 production, red serif 2 production, red serif 3 production, red serif 4 production, and red serif 5 production. not only foretells the comprehensive type of development performance but also foretells that the pseudo-association will be executed. In other words, if the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is a notice that the first pseudo-sequence will be executed, the pseudo-sequence will be executed if the red line performance is executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance. In the case where the pseudo-continuation execution notice effect is foretold as described later, the pseudo-continuation execution notice effect is set in a manner different from the pseudo-continuation execution notice effect set in step S3501 of the advance notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 (second aspect). ) and execute it, and display an additional information image indicating the maximum number of pseudo consecutive times as additional information.

In addition, as the additional information, instead of the information indicating the maximum number of pseudo consecutive runs, information indicating the number of pseudo consecutive runs that have not been executed (the number of pseudo consecutive runs that are scheduled to be executed) may be displayed. Also, for the pseudo consecutive run execution notice performance that notifies the execution of the second or subsequent pseudo consecutive runs, when the conditions of steps S4501 to S4503 are met, the pseudo consecutive run execution notice performance may be changed to the second mode and executed, and an additional information image indicating the maximum number of pseudo consecutive runs may be displayed as additional information.

Then, if the red dialogue performance has been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo continuous execution notice performance in the variable game (step S4503: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4504, and the red dialogue performance is executed. If it has not been completed (step S4503: No), the process moves to step S4514 in FIG. 95.

<Step S4504 and Step S4505>
If the red line performance that foretells the execution of the pseudo-coupling has been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-coupling execution notice production for the first pseudo-coupling in the variable game (step S4503: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the information as additional information. A setting process for a preview display indicating the total number of pseudo consecutives in the variable game is executed (step S4504). The total number of pseudo series in the variable game can be determined, for example, based on the total number of pseudo series stored in step S3602 in the pseudo series notice performance setting process of FIG. 78.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 changes the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance (the preview performance) to a different mode (second mode) from the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance set in step S3501 of the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73 (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. Note that when the MPU 51 executes the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in RAM 512 to store that a comprehensive development performance has been executed (step S4506 of FIG. 93), and ends the preview performance process.

Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the mode of the pseudo-continuation execution notice effect and the additional information image. Specifically, FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the symbol display section 341 when the pseudo-continuous execution notice effect is executed as the first mode, and FIG. 96(B) to FIG. 96(D ) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the symbol display section 341 when the pseudo-continuation execution notice effect is executed as the second mode. Note that FIG. 96(B) is an example of a screen displaying an additional information image indicating that the total number of pseudo-runs is 2, and FIG. 96(C) is an example of a screen displaying additional information indicating that the total number of pseudo-runs is 3. FIG. 96(D) is an example of a screen on which an image is displayed, and an additional information image indicating that the total number of pseudo-runs is 4 is displayed.

The first mode of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is a mode that is executed when the preview content in the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance does not overlap with the preview content in the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: No), and is a mode that is set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the first mode of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is executed by displaying an image of a girl character uttering the words "one more time." At this time, the speech bubble for "one more time" has a text background (inside the speech bubble) that is displayed, for example, in white monotone.

The second mode of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is a mode executed when the preview content in the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance overlaps with the preview content in the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), and is a mode different from the first mode set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 96(B) to FIG. 96(D), the second mode of the pseudo consecutive execution preview performance is executed by being displayed as an image depicting a girl character uttering the words "one more time" like the first mode, but the text background (within the speech bubble) of the speech bubble saying "one more time" is displayed in a different color from the first mode, for example, monotone or patterned in a color other than white.

Further, the additional information image when the pseudo-sequence execution notice performance is executed in the second mode is, for example, as "NEXT x 2" when the total number of pseudo-sequences is 2 as shown in FIG. 96(B). When the total number of pseudo-runs is 3 as shown in FIG. 96(C), it is displayed as "NEXT×3", and as shown in FIG. 96(D), when the total number of pseudo-runs is 4, it is displayed as "NEXT×3". In some cases, it is displayed as "NEXT×4".

Of course, the additional information image showing the total number of pseudo consecutive wins is not limited to the images shown in Fig. 96(B) to Fig. 96(D), and can be displayed as other images as long as the display is recognizable as the total number of pseudo consecutive wins (or the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive wins). For example, the additional information image showing the total number of pseudo consecutive wins (or the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive wins) in the images shown in Fig. 96(B) to Fig. 96(D) may be "x2", "x3", "x4" or the like by omitting "NEXT", or may be "NEXT2", "NEXT3", "NEXT4" or the like by omitting "x". In addition, the additional information image showing the total number of pseudo consecutive wins (or the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive wins) may be a combination of the character "pseudo" indicating that a pseudo consecutive win is executed and a number indicating the total number of pseudo consecutive wins, for example, "pseudo x2", "pseudo x3", "pseudo x4", or "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3", "pseudo 4", etc. Additionally, the additional information image showing the total number of pseudo streaks (or the number of pseudo streaks not yet executed) may be a display showing only the total number of pseudo streaks (or the number of pseudo streaks not yet executed), such as "2", "3", "4" or "Two", "Three", "Four", etc.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a preview performance including a preview content that a pseudo-consecutive will be executed is executed multiple times, an additional information image indicating the total number of pseudo-consecutives (or the number of times not yet executed) is displayed when the later preview performance is executed. In this way, if a preview performance including a preview content that a pseudo-consecutive will be executed multiple times, an additional information image indicating the total number of pseudo-consecutives (or the number of times not yet executed) is displayed when the later preview performance is executed, making it possible to recognize or identify the total number of pseudo-consecutives executed in the variable game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot game will be executed from the total number of pseudo-consecutives ascertained from the additional information image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content of the preview performance executed later is not changed, but the preview performance is executed in a second manner different from the first manner in which the preview performance was determined. In this way, by executing the preview performance executed later in a manner different from the determined manner when the preview contents overlap, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the preview performance and to draw attention to the preview performance and, by creating a sense of incongruity, to the pattern display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4506>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 94, if the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is not a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time, which is specified in step S4003 in the preview performance processing of FIG. 93, is related to the development performance (step S4506). The judgment in this step is whether or not it is a preview of a comprehensive type of development performance, and is executed in the same manner as step S4007 in the preview performance reset processing of FIG. 86 in the sixth embodiment described above. Then, if the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is related to the development performance (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the processing to step S4507, and if the preview content of the preview performance scheduled to be executed this time is not related to the development performance (step S4506: No), the MPU 51 moves the processing to step S4511 in FIG. 95.

<Step S4507>
If the preview content in the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is related to the development performance (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a higher-level development performance as a comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the relevant preview performance. It is determined whether or not it is scheduled to be executed (step S4507). If the MPU 51 plans to execute a higher-level development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the relevant preview performance (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4508, and executes a higher level development performance as a comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the relevant preview performance. If the upper development performance is not scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance (step S4507: No), the process moves to step S4509.

The comprehensive development performance is the same as the sixth embodiment described above, and includes special reach performance, super reach performance, and normal reach performance, with special reach performance being the highest level, super reach performance being medium, and normal reach performance being the highest level. is the lowest.

<Step S4508>
If a higher-level development performance is scheduled to be executed as a comprehensive development performance than the preview content in the preview performance (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the higher-level comprehensive development performance will be executed as a comprehensive development performance (step S4508). Then, the MPU 51 changes the development performance preview performance to a different mode (second mode) from the development preview performance set in the preview performance setting process of Fig. 73 and executes it (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. Note that, when the MPU 51 executes the development preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (step S4506 in Fig. 93), and ends the preview performance processing.

Here, Fig. 97(A) and Fig. 97(B) are diagrams for explaining the mode of the development performance preview performance and the additional information image. Specifically, Fig. 97(A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 when the comprehensive development performance is executed as the first mode, and Fig. 97(B) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 when the comprehensive development performance preview performance is executed as the second mode and an additional information image is displayed.

The first mode of the development performance preview performance for the comprehensive development performance is a mode that is executed when the preview content of the development performance preview performance scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: No), and is a mode that is set in the preview performance setting process of Figure 73. For example, as shown in Figure 97 (A), it is executed by displaying an image of a whale character uttering the words "SP!", which correspond to a super reach. At this time, the speech bubble for "SP!" is displayed with the text background (inside the speech bubble) displayed, for example, in white monotone.

The second mode of the development performance preview performance for the comprehensive development performance is a mode executed when the preview content of the development performance preview performance scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), and is a mode different from the first mode set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 97(B), it is executed by displaying an image of a whale character uttering the words "SP!" corresponding to a super reach, similar to the first mode. At this time, the text background (inside the speech bubble) of "SP!" is displayed in a different color from the first mode, for example, a monotone color other than white or with a pattern.

In addition, when a development performance preview performance for a comprehensive development performance is executed in the second mode, the additional information image (performance upgrade image) is an image indicating that a comprehensive development performance of a higher level than the comprehensive development performance previously previewed as a development performance will be executed as additional information. In the example shown in FIG. 97(B), when a super reach is previously previewed as a development performance, the additional information image clearly indicates that a special reach of a higher level will be executed as the comprehensive development performance. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a text image of "SPSP!" corresponding to the special reach, close to a whale character.

Of course, the additional information image indicating that a higher-level comprehensive development effect such as special reach is to be executed can be changed to the image shown in FIG. It can be displayed as another image without limitation. For example, the additional information image indicating that a higher-level comprehensive development effect is to be executed may be "SPSP Reach," "Special Reach," "Special," or the like.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a preview performance including a preview content indicating that a comprehensive development performance will be executed is executed in duplicate, an additional information image is displayed at the time of execution of the later preview performance, indicating that a comprehensive development performance of a higher level than the comprehensive development performance predicted in the earlier preview performance will be executed later. In this way, if a preview performance including a preview content indicating that a comprehensive development performance will be executed in duplicate, an additional information image is displayed at the time of execution of the later preview performance, indicating that a comprehensive development performance of a higher level than the comprehensive development performance predicted in the earlier preview performance will be executed later, making it possible to recognize or identify the comprehensive development performance that will be executed later in the variable game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be the execution of a jackpot game from the comprehensive development performance understood from the additional information image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content of the preview performance executed later is not changed, but the preview performance is executed in a second manner different from the first manner in which the preview performance was determined. In this way, by executing the preview performance executed later in a manner different from the determined manner when the preview contents overlap, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the preview performance and to draw attention to the preview performance and, by creating a sense of incongruity, to the pattern display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4509>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 94, if there is no plan to execute a higher-level development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the preview content in the preview effect (step S4507: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the development effect can be realized. Or, for example, it is determined whether a preview performance that foretells a specific type of development performance has been executed (step S4509).

Here, the advance notice of the specific development performance type of the development performance is the same as in the sixth embodiment described above, and which development performance will be executed among the development performances at the same level (see FIG. 76(B)). This is a notice detailing what will happen. For example, if the normal reach performances that fall under the comprehensive development performance include Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, Kujirachi reach performance, and Sam reach performance, these Warin reach performance, Ulin reach performance, Marine reach performance, and Kujirachi Each of the reach performance and the thumb reach performance corresponds to a concrete development performance, and the fact that the marine reach performance of the normal reach performance is announced to be executed corresponds to a notice of the concrete development performance type.

If the MPU 51 is able to specify a specific type of development performance for the development performance (step S4509: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4510. If the MPU 51 is unable to specify a specific type of development performance for the development performance (step S4509: No), the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 95.

<Step S4510>
If it is possible to embody the specific development effect type of the development effect (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the specific development effect type is to be executed (step S4510). Then, the MPU 51 executes the advanced presentation notice effect in a different manner (second mode) from the advanced notice effect set in the advance notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 (step S4505), and executes the additional information display setting process. end. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the development preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the preview effect processing is ended.

Here, FIG. 97(C) shows an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 when a development performance preview performance for a comprehensive development performance is executed as the second mode and an additional information image is displayed.

The additional information image (actualization image) when the development performance preview performance is executed in the second mode is a more specific development performance type of the comprehensive development performance previously announced as the development performance as additional information. This is an image showing that is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 97(C), when it is announced that Super Reach will be executed as an advanced performance in the preview performance, the additional information image clearly indicates that Marine Super Reach of the Super Reach will be executed. be done. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a text image of "Marine SP!" corresponding to Marine Super Reach in close proximity to the whale character.

Of course, the additional information image showing a specific development destination such as Marine Super Reach can be displayed as another image, not limited to the image shown in FIG. 97(C), as long as the specific development destination is recognizable. For example, the additional information image showing a specific development destination may be "Marine Reach", "Marine Special Reach", "Marine Special", etc.

In this way, in the present embodiment, if a preview performance that includes the execution of a comprehensive development performance as a preview content is executed overlappingly, when the subsequent preview performance is executed, the information announced in the previous preview performance is An additional information image regarding the development performance that is more specific (detailed) of the comprehensive development performance is displayed. In this way, if a preview performance that includes the execution of a comprehensive development performance as a preview content is executed repeatedly, when the subsequent preview performance is executed, the comprehensive development performance announced in the previous preview performance will be executed. By displaying an additional information image regarding a more specific (detailed) development performance, it becomes possible to recognize or specify a specific development performance that will be executed later in the variable game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot game based on the specific development effect ascertained from the additional information image. This improves the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content of the preview performance executed later is not changed, but the preview performance is executed in a second manner different from the first manner in which the preview performance was determined. In this way, by executing the preview performance executed later in a manner different from the determined manner when the preview contents overlap, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the preview performance and to draw attention to the preview performance and, by creating a sense of incongruity, to the pattern display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

In this embodiment, when the step-up (superiorization) of the preview content as the comprehensive development performance type is not possible, the specific development performance type is displayed as additional information. In this case, there is a concern that the level of the final individual performance will be easily grasped by the player at the stage when the specific development performance type is presented. For example, if the execution of the normal reach performance is predicted first, and then the specific development performance type of the normal reach performance is presented, the player will understand that the variable game will not develop into the super reach performance or the special reach performance, but will end with the normal reach performance. And when it is understood that it will not develop into the super reach performance or the special reach performance, it is understood that the expectation of a big win is low, and the interest in the progress of the variable game will decrease. Therefore, even when the step-up (superiorization) of the preview content as the comprehensive development performance type is possible, it is also possible to make the specific development performance type possible to be presented. In this way, even when the step-up (superiorization) of the preview content as the comprehensive development performance type is possible, the level of the reach performance that will finally be executed is difficult to grasp because the specific development performance type can be presented. This makes it difficult to understand the likelihood (reliability) of a jackpot, which helps prevent a decline in interest in the progress of the variable game.

<Step S4511>
If the preview content in the preview performance that was scheduled to be executed this time is not related to the advanced performance (step S4506: No), as shown in FIG. Does it indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot (a display clearly indicating that it is a jackpot is executed, for example, a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero or the words "jackpot" are displayed)? It is determined whether or not (step S4511). If the preview content in the preview performance indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4511: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4512, and displays the preview content in the preview performance. When does not indicate that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4511: No), the process moves to step S4514.

<Step S4512>
If the contents of the notice in the notice performance indicate that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4511: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot with a probability of winning (step S4512). Whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot with a probability of winning can be judged based on whether the 5R probability of winning flag or the 16R probability of winning flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 when a variable pattern command is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 72, is on. Then, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot with a probability of winning (step S4512: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4513, and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a jackpot with a probability of winning (step S4512: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4514.

<Step S4513>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot with a high probability (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot with a high probability (step S4513). Then, the MPU 51 changes the development performance notice performance to a different mode (second mode) from the development notice performance set in the notice performance setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505 in FIG. 94), and ends the additional information display setting process. Note that, when the MPU 51 executes the development notice performance, it updates the notice performance execution history storage area of the notice performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (step S4506 in FIG. 93), and ends the notice performance processing.

Here, FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the mode of the big win preview performance and the additional information image. Specifically, FIG. 98(A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 when the big win preview performance is executed in the first mode, and FIG. 98(B) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 when the big win preview performance is executed in the second mode and an additional information image is displayed.

The first aspect of the jackpot preview performance is a mode that is executed when the preview content of the jackpot preview performance scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap with the preview content of the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: No). This is the mode set in the preview effect setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a whale character may be displayed as an image showing the word "Jackpot!" indicating that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot. executed. At this time, the text background (inside the speech bubble) of the "Jackpot!" speech bubble is displayed as a white monotone, for example.

The second mode of the jackpot preview performance is a mode executed when the preview content in the currently scheduled development preview performance overlaps with the preview content in the previously executed preview performance (step S4004: Yes), and is a mode different from the first mode set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 98(B), it is executed by displaying an image of a whale character uttering the words "Jackpot!", indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, just like the first mode. At this time, the text background (inside the speech bubble) of the "Jackpot!" is displayed in a different color from the first mode, for example, a monotone color other than white or with a pattern.

In addition, when the jackpot prediction performance is executed in the second mode, the additional information image (performance upgrade image, performance detail image) is an image that not only indicates that the jackpot is a jackpot that was previously predicted as additional information, but also indicates that the jackpot is a jackpot with a high probability of occurring. In the example shown in FIG. 98(B), when the lottery result is a jackpot that is previously predicted in the prediction performance, the additional information image clearly indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot with a high probability of occurring. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed close to a whale character as a text image of "High probability of occurring!" indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot with a high probability of occurring.

Of course, the additional information image indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 98(B) and can be displayed as other images as long as the display allows the player to recognize that the lottery result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning. For example, the additional information image indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning may be "jackpot with a high probability of winning," "Kaku-Ku-Hen," "Kaku-Hen," "Kaku-Hen," "Kaku-Hen," etc.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the preview performance including the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (the display clearly indicating that it is a jackpot is executed) is repeatedly executed. When the subsequent preview performance is executed, an additional information image is displayed indicating that it is a probability-variable jackpot that is more specific (detailed) and advanced (stepped up) from the content announced in the previous preview performance. In this way, if the preview effects that include the fact that the lottery result is a jackpot are executed repeatedly, when the later preview effects are executed, the content foretold in the previous preview effects will be made more specific ( By displaying an additional information image indicating that it is a variable probability jackpot that has been upgraded to a higher level, it becomes possible to recognize or specify that the lottery result for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview contents are not changed in the preview performance that is executed later, but the preview performance is performed in a second mode different from the first mode in which the preview effect is determined. executed. In this way, when the preview content overlaps, the preview performance to be executed later is executed in a manner different from the determined format, thereby drawing the player's attention to the preview performance and causing a sense of discomfort, thereby causing the preview performance to become worse. It becomes possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4514>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 95, if the pseudo-series corresponding to the current pseudo-series execution preview performance is not the first pseudo-series in the variable game (step S4502 in FIG. 94: No), or if the red line performance has not been executed. (Step S4503 in FIG. 94: No), if it is impossible to materialize the specific development performance type of the development performance (Step S4509 in FIG. 94: No), the preview content in the preview performance is the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. does not indicate a jackpot (step S4511: No), or if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a guaranteed variable jackpot (step S4512: No), the MPU 51 It is determined whether a pending display change of the display (the relevant variable symbol) is set (step S4514). That is, when the MPU 51 cannot upgrade or materialize (detail) the overlapping preview content, it determines whether or not a pending display change of the variable display (the variable symbol) for the variable game is set. Note that the pending display change of the variable display for the variable game is the same as in the sixth embodiment described above.

In step S4514, the MPU 51 determines whether a pending change of the variable display is set in the variable play, thereby determining whether a pending change of the variable display is possible. If a pending change of the variable display is set in the variable play (step S4514: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4515, and if a pending change of the variable display is not set in the variable play (step S4514: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4516.

<Step S4515>
If the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game (step S4514: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed in the variable game (step S4515). Then, the MPU 51 changes the preview performance to a mode (second mode) different from the preview performance set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. do. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the development preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the preview effect processing is ended.

Here, FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the symbol display section 341 when the development performance preview performance for the comprehensive development performance is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 99(A), the additional information image when the development effect preview effect is executed in the second mode is an image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed as the additional information. In the example shown in FIG. 99(A), when it is announced in advance that a comprehensive development effect will be executed in the preview effect, the additional information image clearly indicates that the pending change of the variable display will be executed. . Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of "Change!" indicating that a pending change will occur in the vicinity of the fluctuation display.

Note that Figure 99 (A) shows an example in which an additional information image indicating that a pending change in the variable display will be executed is displayed when the development performance preview performance is executed as the second mode, but even if the preview performance is another preview performance such as a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance, when an additional information image indicating that a pending change in the variable display will be executed is displayed, an image similar to the additional information image shown in Figure 99 (A) is displayed.

Further, the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the relevant variable display is to be executed is limited to the image shown in FIG. It can be displayed as another image without changing the image. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change in the variable display is to be executed may be "pending change," "change," "rank up," or the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, when preview effects including the same preview content are executed overlappingly, an additional information image indicating that a pending change of the variable display will be executed is displayed when the subsequent preview effect is executed. Is displayed. In this way, when preview effects that include the same preview content are executed overlappingly, an additional information image indicating that a pending change of the relevant variable display will be executed is displayed when the subsequent preview effect is executed. , it becomes possible to recognize that the pending change of the relevant change display will be executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating how the hold will change with high expectations, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that the pending change in the fluctuation display indicates that it will be executed, that is, the additional information image presents information different from the preview content in the preview performance, the preview in the preview performance In cases where the content cannot be upgraded (stepped up) or detailed (concretized), information regarding future events in the variable game can be presented. This makes it possible for the player to obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview contents are not changed in the preview performance that is executed later, but the preview performance is performed in a second mode different from the first mode in which the preview effect is determined. executed. In this way, when the preview content overlaps, the preview performance to be executed later is executed in a manner different from the determined format, thereby drawing the player's attention to the preview performance and causing a sense of discomfort, thereby causing the preview performance to become worse. It becomes possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4516>
If the reserved change of the variable display is not set in the variable game (step S4514: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S4516). Whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved can be judged based on the first reservation and the second reservation that are updated when the first reservation command or the second reservation command is received, for example. Then, if the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4517.

On the other hand, if the right to execute a variable game is not reserved (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4505 in FIG. 94. In other words, if there is no information to be presented as a future occurrence event in the variable game and the right to execute a variable game is not reserved (if there is no information to be presented as a future occurrence event from the next variation onwards), the MPU 51 executes the subsequent preview performance in the second mode without displaying the additional information image (step S4505), and terminates the additional information display setting process. Of course, if the additional information image is not displayed, the subsequent preview performance may be executed in the first mode.

<Step S4517>
If there is a reservation for the right to play a variable game (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the reservation for the right to play a variable game includes a lottery result of the jackpot lottery (step S4517). Whether or not the reservation for the right to play a variable game includes a lottery result of the jackpot lottery can be judged based on the first reservation and the second reservation that are updated when the first reservation command or the second reservation command is received, for example.

Then, when the reservation of the right to execute the variable game includes one in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4518, and executes the variable game. If the reservation of the right to execute does not include a lottery result of a jackpot lottery (step S4517: No), the process moves to step S4519.

<Step S4518>
If the reserved right to execute the variable play includes a lottery result of the big win lottery that is a big win (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the reserved right after the variable play includes a lottery result of the big win lottery that is a big win (step S4518). Then, the MPU 51 changes the preview performance to a different mode (second mode) from the preview performance set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. Note that, when the MPU 51 executes the development preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the preview performance resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (step S4506 in FIG. 93), and ends the preview performance processing.

Here, FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the symbol display section 341 when the development performance preview performance for the comprehensive development performance is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 99(B), when the development performance preview performance is executed in the second mode, the additional information image is an image indicating, as additional information, that the reserved items after the variable play include items that will result in a jackpot lottery result in a jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 99(B), when the preview performance previously predicts that a comprehensive development performance will be executed, the additional information image clearly indicates that the reserved items after the variable play include items that will result in a jackpot lottery result in a jackpot. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a text image of "Pending win!" adjacent to the reserved display after the variable play, indicating that a reserved win is included.

In addition, Figure 99 (B) shows an example in which, when the development performance preview performance is executed as the second mode, an additional information image is displayed indicating that the reserved items after the variable play include items that will be a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery. However, even if the preview performance is another preview performance such as a pseudo consecutive execution preview performance, when an additional information image is displayed indicating that the reserved items after the variable play include items that will be a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery, an image similar to the additional information image shown in Figure 99 (B) is displayed.

In addition, an additional information image indicating that the holding after the variable game includes a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot lottery result among the hold after the variable game. The image is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 99(B), but can be displayed as any other image as long as the image includes a jackpot. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change in the variable display is to be executed may be "win", "jackpot", "confirmed", etc.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a preview performance that includes the same preview content is executed overlappingly, when the subsequent preview performance is executed, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be displayed as a jackpot during the pending after the variable game. An additional information image is displayed that indicates that the following information is included. In this way, if a preview performance that includes the same preview content is executed repeatedly, when the subsequent preview performance is executed, a jackpot lottery result that is a jackpot will be included in the pending variable game after the relevant variable game. By displaying the additional information image indicating that the lottery is a jackpot, it becomes possible to recognize that the holding after the variable game includes a jackpot lottery whose lottery result is a jackpot. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the variable game while expecting that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be executed even though the lottery result is a jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the pending after the variable game includes a jackpot lottery whose lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the additional information image presents information different from the preview content in the preview performance. For some reason, it is not possible to upgrade (step up) and make detailed (concrete) the preview content in the preview performance, and information regarding future events in the variable game can be presented. This makes it possible for the player to obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content of the preview performance executed later is not changed, but the preview performance is executed in a second manner different from the first manner in which the preview performance was determined. In this way, by executing the preview performance executed later in a manner different from the determined manner when the preview contents overlap, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the preview performance and to draw attention to the preview performance and, by creating a sense of incongruity, to the pattern display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4519>
If the reserved right to play the variable play does not include the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (step S4517: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not there is a setting for a reserved display change for the variable play (reserved) after the variable play (step S4519). If there is a setting for a reserved display change for the variable play (reserved) after the variable play (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4520.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not have a pending change setting of the pending display for the variable game (on hold) after the variable game (step S4516: No), the process moves to step S4505 in FIG. 94. In other words, if there is no information to be presented as a future event in the fluctuation game, and there is no information to be presented as a future event after the next fluctuation, the subsequent preview effect will be executed in the second mode without displaying the additional information image. (Step S4505), and the additional information display setting process ends. Of course, if the additional information image is not displayed, the subsequent preview effect may be performed in the first mode.

<Step S4520>
If there is a setting for a pending change in the pending display for the variable game (pending) after the variable game (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the pending display for the variable game (pending) after the variable game in question. An additional information image indicating that the object is included is set (step S4518). Then, the MPU 51 changes the preview performance to a mode (second mode) different from the preview performance set in the preview performance setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. do. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the development preview performance, it updates the preview performance execution history storage area of the storage area for resetting the preview performance set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development performance has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the preview effect processing is ended.

Here, FIG. 99(C) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the symbol display section 341 when the development performance preview performance for the comprehensive development performance is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 99(C), the additional information image when the development performance preview performance is executed in the second mode is an image indicating that the pending display for the variable play (pending) after the variable play includes items that will be changed on a pending basis. In the example shown in FIG. 99(C), when the preview performance previously predicts that a comprehensive development performance will be executed, the additional information image clearly indicates that the pending display for the variable play (pending) after the variable play includes items that will be changed on a pending basis. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a text image of "Pending change!" indicating that the pending display for the variable play (pending) after the variable play includes items that will be changed on a pending basis.

In addition, in FIG. 99(C), when the advanced performance preview performance is executed as the second mode, a pending change is included in the pending display for the variable game (pending) after the variable game concerned. An example is shown in which an additional information image is displayed, but even if the preview performance is another preview performance such as a pseudo-continuous execution notice performance, the display will be displayed for the variable game (on hold) after the relevant variable game. When displaying an additional information image indicating that a pending change is included, an image similar to the additional information image shown in FIG. 99(C) is displayed.

In addition, the additional information image indicating that the pending display for the variable game (pending) after the variable game includes a pending change is the lottery result of the jackpot lottery among the pending changes after the variable game. The image is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 99(C), but can be displayed as any other image as long as the image includes a jackpot. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change in the variable display is to be executed may be "change", "level up", or the like.

In this way, in this embodiment, if preview performances including the same preview content are executed in duplicate, when the later preview performance is executed, an additional information image is displayed indicating that the pending display for the variable play (on hold) after the variable play includes a pending change. In this way, if preview performances including the same preview content are executed in duplicate, when the later preview performance is executed, an additional information image is displayed indicating that the pending display for the variable play (on hold) after the variable play includes a pending change, making it possible to recognize that a pending change of the pending display for the variable play (on hold) after the variable play will be executed. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating what pending display for the variable play (on hold) after the variable play will change to, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, it must be an indication that the pending display for variable games (on hold) after the variable game concerned includes things that will change on hold, that is, the additional information image is different from the preview content in the preview effect. In cases where the content of the preview in the preview performance cannot be upgraded (stepped up) or detailed (materialized) due to the presentation of information, information regarding future events that will occur in the variable game after the relevant variable game. can be presented. This allows the player to obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content is not changed in the preview performance that is executed later, but the preview performance is performed in a second mode different from the first mode in which the preview effect is determined. executed. In this way, when the preview content overlaps, the preview performance to be executed later is executed in a manner different from the determined format, thereby drawing the player's attention to the preview performance and causing a sense of discomfort, thereby causing the preview performance to become worse. It becomes possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed, the preview content in the preview performance that is executed later is executed without change, and additional information different from the preview content is displayed in the game. presented to the person. That is, in this embodiment, when a preview performance with the same preview content is executed, the execution of a subsequent preview performance is not restricted, and in addition to the overlapping preview content, the execution of the preview performance with the same preview content is not restricted. Additional information different from the information presented by the preview performance is presented. In this way, the execution of the preview performance that will be executed later is not restricted, and additional information is presented in addition to the overlapping preview content, so that in addition to the information grasped from the relevant preview performance, information that is different from this information is displayed. Additional information can be obtained at the same time. Therefore, when a preview effect with the same preview content is executed, the user's immediate focus is changed by presenting additional information, and it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction and a sense of benefit from obtaining the additional information. This reduces the discomfort caused by the execution of preview performances with the same preview content, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is unaware that a preview performance with the same preview content has been executed twice, or even if the player has limited knowledge of gaming machines, the additional information presented will allow the player to perform the preview performance multiple times. Not only will it be possible to easily understand that different information has been presented, but based on the additional information, for example, the content of the variable game performance that will occur later in the variable game or the pending game after the variable game, or the jackpot lottery. It becomes possible to specify the lottery results.

Further, in this embodiment, the additional information is related to a variable game performance that is a future occurrence event in the variable game. In this way, since the (unannounced) future occurrence event (additional information) is related to the variable game performance that will be executed in the variable game, a part of the variable game effect that will occur in the future in the variable game recognition or identification becomes possible. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be the one to execute the jackpot game from a part of the fluctuating game effect ascertained from the additional information. This improves the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, content unrelated to the variable play may be presented as additional information. In this way, by being able to display content unrelated to the variable play as additional information, it becomes possible to present additional information even if there is no future event occurring in the variable play that can be presented as additional information.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when additional information is presented, the preview content in the preview effect to be executed later is not changed, but the preview effect is executed in a different manner from the determined mode. In this way, when the preview content overlaps, the preview performance to be executed later is executed in a manner different from the determined format, thereby drawing the player's attention to the preview performance and causing a sense of discomfort, thereby causing the preview performance to become worse. It becomes possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that additional information is being presented.

In this embodiment, when a preview performance is executed that indicates that a pseudo-consecutive will be executed as the same preview content, the total number of pseudo-consecutives or the number of times that have not been executed is presented as additional information, but in the case of a preview performance in which a maximum number of performances are executed in the same way as a pseudo-consecutive, such as a step-up performance, the number of times up to the final step of the step-up may also be presented.

In addition, in this embodiment, to the extent applicable, design changes similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments described above are possible, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to seventh embodiments described above.

For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the execution of a preview performance to be executed later may be restricted, and the preview performance to be executed later may be changed to another performance, and then additional information may be displayed. Furthermore, restrictions on preview performances to be executed later, changes to performances, etc. may be similar to those in the sixth embodiment described above.

In addition, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when setting a preview effect, it is determined whether a preview effect including the same preview content has been set, and if a preview effect including the same preview content is set, , additional information may be set to be displayed when a later preview effect is executed. In this way, when setting a preview effect, additional information is displayed if a preview effect that includes the same preview content is set, making it unnecessary to remember the executed preview effect each time the preview effect is executed. Moreover, there is no need to judge whether a preview performance including the same preview content has been executed in the past each time a preview performance is to be executed. Therefore, while reducing the control burden during the execution of the variable game, a decrease in interest in the game due to execution of preview effects including the same preview content is prevented.

In addition, when setting the additional information to be displayed, the subsequent preview performance may be changed to a second mode different from the first mode (the mode initially set in the preview performance setting process) and set. In this way, when setting the additional information to be displayed, by changing the subsequent preview performance to a second mode different from the first mode, it is easy to know that additional information is being presented.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Furthermore, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. be done. This allows the player to specify specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and also allows the player to recognize predetermined numerical information by displaying all specific numerical information. be. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that:

[Appendix A3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4', the special information is displayed in a part of the multiple display areas of the display means in which the specific information is displayed. In other words, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. This allows the specific information and the special information to be displayed on a common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means that displays specific information and special information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image types and display modes to be displayed as the specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in a variety of forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6', characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7', the specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8', when specific conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is the transition determination. The period is set to indicate or clarify the results of the Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when a variable display image of a symbol suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to cause the image display means to display specific information at the same time. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of migration determination by displaying specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specific condition is established when the gaming ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9', a specific condition may be met when the specific area is passed through, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition is met. In addition, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A10' to appendix A12', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second outlet into which the ball can enter in a special game, a specific message is displayed on the display means. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter a variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A14']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A15']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine of Appendix A20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set as the execution period of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and further guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (regular period). The interest in playing games is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numbers) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A21' or A22', wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23', if a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. Can be done. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A23', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is transitioned when the result of transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23' or Appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, when special games are started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as when winning consecutive games, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Moreover, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a given period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if a specific condition is met in that specific period, each specific period elapses. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the special game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively utilized to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the game can be made more interesting because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373) and that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) to win a display lottery that is executed as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A26', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. In this way, by performing a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it is possible to determine whether or not you have won the display lottery (whether specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the following points, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty level and variation in displaying specific information). As a result, various playability can be imparted to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3', characterized in that the game machine displays the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, it is possible to specify all the specific numerical information. can. Further, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period, it is expected that many specific conditions will be met in a predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
Supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in A29'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the corresponding relationship. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
According to appendix A33', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decoration pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A29' to Appendix A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or alphabets, making it easy to identify or infer specific numerical information, and without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29', characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to appendix A36' or A37', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when the specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value imparting game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period. an operating means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of mutually different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A46' or appendix A47', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A48', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A48' to A50', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one display content among the display contents of a plurality of specific information displayed in a plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the content to be presented on the second display means from among the display content of a plurality of pieces of specific information, the player can confirm the display content that he or she desires. As a result, it is possible to effectively check the displayed contents while avoiding checking the displayed contents such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be checked efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be checked at once, so that the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machines according to Appendix A51' and Appendix A52' are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period, and different displays are displayed during each of the prescribed period and the special period. Specific information is displayed depending on the means. Therefore, in the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, in a special period (for example, standby state), the display contents of specific information in a specified period are presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the variable display image display means presents the display content of specific information in a specified period, visibility is improved. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as performances and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the variable display image display means is made to present the display contents of the specific information in the specified period, the display contents of the specific information in the specified period can be displayed in a variable manner by the same operations as those for making various settings. It becomes possible to have the image displayed on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience in displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A55']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A53', characterized in that a display is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A56']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57', it is also possible to make a particular display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a particular non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a particular non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders include a first display in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. including the order;
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player. In this way, the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the disadvantageous advantageous judgment probability and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player are given a low priority, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than that of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix A61']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
Supplementary Notes A1' to A3 further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period. A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is performed as a benefit for the player who played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This can prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62', wherein the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A63', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the waiting period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix A64']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine described in appendix A62' or appendix A63'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix A65']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. , when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the display means (35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable judgment is low when the probability of a favorable judgment corresponds to a low probability of a favorable judgment. As a result, even if the probability of a favorable judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix A66']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is specified based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A65' or appendix A66', characterized in that the gaming machine displays a display.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A68']
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
further comprising a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility by the player is restricted;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix A70']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the rear side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple task of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70' or appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the game machine according to appendix A72', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be set by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened in the event of a jam in the game machine, the predetermined information will be displayed to the player through the second display means. It is possible to reliably prevent this information from being grasped by someone else.

[Appendix B1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1', a specific condition can be met by passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been met. In addition, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means by the gaming ball passing through the specific area. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1', characterized in that:

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2' or Appendix B3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B5']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine according to appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) allows a ball to enter in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix B6', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass therethrough.

In the game machine according to appendix B7', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can pass in the special game, the display means The display content of specific information displayed on the screen is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second ejection port by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball win the variable prize opening. Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill by simply playing the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game balls entering the second ejection port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine due to the possibility of a difference in skill. Prevented.

[Appendix B8']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7', further comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix B8', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of game balls by the distribution means. This gives you the gameplay of playing the game. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game balls in the distribution means as to whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1' to B8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix B9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix C1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix C3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C3', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C4', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix C7']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix C6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix C9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix C10' is a conventional slot machine in which all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix D1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The specified period is set to a period during which the special game is being played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (part of the numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix D1', characterized in that it is possible to display the information on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix D5']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5', if a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. Can be done. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix D5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' or Appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value imparting game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value imparting game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively used to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1' to Appendix D8', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various gameplay characteristics to be provided with respect to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1' to D9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D11' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix E1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types of numerical information are stored in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specified period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specified period, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied, hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the specified period.

[Appendix E2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information, as described in any one of appendices E1' to E3'. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
Supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7', the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with an information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
According to appendix E8', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a symbol (decoration symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E5' to Appendix E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4' is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display section (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes: a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the form of the individual display section. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E13' and appendix E14', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein a start time of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determining means has a lower probability of determining that the transition will be made to the special gaming state than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the game is true or not.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of players in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information can be obtained to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E20', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E21', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix E22' is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix F1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information (non-set value) among the plurality of types of numerical information is display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating ) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
display order determining means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) controls the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Display the specific information on (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. By the way, power to gaming machines is often turned on before the opening of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined every business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is powered on. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and from making the display of the specific information monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value imparting game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix F10']
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appended claim F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start time is set for the special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', in the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determination means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or F12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period for the special game in addition to the start period of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix F15']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix F14', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F16', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge the height. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F17', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F18' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix G1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1', characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix G3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also be able to specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred based on special information. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, which improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of mutually different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The game according to any one of appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341). Machine.

[Appendix G6']
The display content display control means (51) causes the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period based on the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7']
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5' to appendix G7', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to appendix G8', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

The gaming machine according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so that when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge the height. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix G10', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix H1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-specific numerical information) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is a display control means (51) for displaying a plurality of pieces of specific information (numbers) indicating the set value on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a distinguishable manner;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1', characterized by the following.

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2' or appendix H3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only specify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred by Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, which improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to appendix H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, or to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-setting value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-setting value. It also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of favorable determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability with the highest probability;
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest priorities,
The second display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8', the second display order has a lower priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. is likely to be selected. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of determining advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the game on the gaming machine may be ended early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the highest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that it is not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player, but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the priority of the two specific pieces of information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, the advantages for the player are contradictory. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two favorable judgment probabilities it is, it becomes possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability having a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the probability;
The third display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of an advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of an advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of an advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous judgment up until just before the first probability of an advantageous judgment is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of an advantageous judgment will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous judgment is grasped.

[Appendix H10']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H11' or H12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11' to H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14' or appendix H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix H17' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix I1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that:

[Appendix I3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I3', wherein a period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the standby period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix I5']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix I6', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix I7' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix J1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
If a second specific condition different from the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types are Display control for displaying on the display means (35, 39, 341) a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information in a distinguishable manner. means (51);
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied; Displaying the plurality of specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from early realizing that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low when the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponds to a low probability of an advantageous judgment. As a result, even if the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is such that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix J1' to appendix J3', characterized in that the game machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appended note J4', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the game machine displays the following information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determination means determines that the probability of transitioning to the special gaming state is lower than that of the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or J8', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period for the special game in addition to the start period of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J12', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J13', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J14', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix J14' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix K1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. This allows the player to not only specify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred by Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, which improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
Further comprising a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board that is openably and closably fixed to the frame. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player. You can check this at the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted by the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to claim K4' or K5', wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K7', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix K7', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K8', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix K8' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, advance notice performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
A gaming machine including, as the notification game performance, a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition judgment, and an accompanying game performance (advance notice performance) that is executed in association with the main game performance and clearly indicates or suggests (advance notice) a future occurrence event that will occur in the notification game,
The sub-control means (51)
A main game performance determination means (51) for determining the main game performance;
An associated game performance determination means (51) for determining the associated game performance;
A game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the associated game performance;
an associated game performance execution limiting means (51) for limiting execution of at least one of the plurality of associated game performances when the associated game performance determination means (51) has determined a plurality of associated game performances that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, execution of at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects is restricted. be done. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, execution of at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects is restricted. , execution of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future occurrence event in one notification game is suppressed. As a result, since it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of accompanying game performances that clearly or suggest the same future event, the accompanying game that clearly or suggests the same future event A decrease in interest in the game due to execution of the performance is prevented.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the associated game performance execution restriction means (51) does not execute at least one of the associated game performances when a predetermined condition is met when the multiple associated game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event have been determined.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is not executed. In this way, by not executing multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event, the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A3]
The incidental game performance execution limiting means (51) is configured to control the incidental game performance execution restricting means (51) when the plurality of incidental game performances that specify or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event are determined. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the at least one incidental game performance is changed to another incidental game performance that clearly or suggests a different event from the future occurrence event that is specified or suggested by the at least one incidental game performance. The gaming machine according to appendix A2.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, when a plurality of incidental game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects clearly or The game is changed to another accompanying game production with different suggested content. In this way, when multiple incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one of the incidental game effects has different explicit or suggested content. By changing to another accompanying game performance, execution of an accompanying game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event in one notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of an accompanying game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event. In addition, the player can obtain more information by changing from at least one incidental game effect to another incidental game effect. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes an event that is different from the event specified or suggested by the incidental game performance determined by the incidental game performance determining means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A2 or A3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appended note A4, the predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a predetermined future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means. In this way, the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a predetermined future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means, so that it is possible to restrict the execution of the at least one associated game performance by changing the at least one associated game performance to another associated game performance that indicates or suggests the predetermined future occurrence event. In this way, by changing the at least one associated game performance to another associated game performance that indicates or suggests the predetermined future occurrence event, it is possible to provide information on a new future occurrence event that is not indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means. This increases the amount of information available to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the progress of the game based on the newly obtained information, and increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A5]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a future occurrence event that is different from the future occurrence event specified or suggested by the incidental game performance determined by the incidental game performance determination means. The gaming machine according to appendix A2 or A3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition determination causes the game to transition to the special gaming state. In this way, if the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, the at least one accompanying game performance may be executed. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game performances including the same explicit or suggested content are executed, there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination is to cause the game to transition to the special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase expectations that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state when multiple accompanying game effects that include the same explicit or suggested content are executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2 or Appendix A3, wherein the associated game performance execution restriction means (51) has an execution determination means (51) for determining by lottery whether or not to execute at least one associated game performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, whether or not to execute the at least one associated game performance is determined by lottery. In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the at least one associated game performance by lottery, it is possible to determine whether or not the execution of the at least one associated game performance is restricted by lottery. Furthermore, depending on the probability that the lottery determines that the at least one associated game performance is restricted, it is possible to provide variety to the restriction on the execution of the at least one associated game performance. This makes it possible to provide variety to the playability of the gaming machine, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

[Appendix A7]
The special game is a first game state in which after the special game ends, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination is executed with a first probability (low probability mode). 1 special game (normal jackpot game), and after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability. A first special game (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second gaming state (probable variable jackpot game state),
The result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) is a first determination result (usually jackpot) that transitions to the first gaming state after the end of the notification game, and a result of the transition to the second game state after the end of the notification game. Including the second determination result (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to the state,
The probability of determining that the at least one incidental game performance is not executed in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51) is determined depending on whether the result of the transition determination is the first determination result or the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result. The gaming machine according to appendix A6, which is different depending on the case where the result is the second determination result.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game performance is determined not to be executed is determined based on whether the result of the transition determination is a first determination result disadvantageous to the player and the result of the transition determination. This is different depending on the case where the second determination result is advantageous to the player. In this way, the decision probability that the at least one accompanying game performance is determined not to be executed is determined based on the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player, and the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player. By being different from the case where the second determination result is advantageous, it is possible to provide a gameplay feature in which future occurrence events can be guessed based on the set decision probability, thereby improving the interest of the game. For example, by setting the decision probability according to the result of the transition determination, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the result of the transition determination to be guessed, that is, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be transitioned to a special gaming state ( It is possible to provide gameplay that can be estimated (reliability).

[Appendix A8]
According to appendix A7, the decision probability is higher when the result of the transition determination is the first determination result than when the result of the transition determination is the second determination result. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, the probability of determining that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed is higher when the transition judgment result is the first judgment result that is unfavorable to the player than when the transition judgment result is the second judgment result that is favorable to the player. In this way, the probability of determination is higher when the transition judgment result is the first judgment result that is unfavorable to the player than when the transition judgment result is the second judgment result that is favorable to the player, and the execution of the at least one associated game performance provides a gameplay that increases the expectation (reliability) that the transition judgment result will be a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance executed as a part of the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation. In this way, because the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation, it becomes possible to recognize or identify a part of the main game presentation that will occur in the future in the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game state from the part of the main game presentation grasped from the future occurrence event, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is an advanced performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is the advanced performance. In this way, since the performance performed as a part of the main game performance is a development performance, the development performance destination to be performed in the main game performance is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested. This prevents discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of the development performance to be performed. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of performances with the same explicit or suggested content.

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to appendix A10, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A11, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance. In this way, since the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance, it is possible to prevent the performance related to the result of the transition determination from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent discomfort caused by repeated presentation or suggestion of effects regarding the result of the transition determination. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of performances with the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the transition determination result will be a transition to the special game state by the main game presentation.

[Appendix A13]
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot game) which is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, and a first special game (probability jackpot game) which is shifted to a second game state (probability jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) which is higher than the first probability after the special game is ended,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the transition determination result is a transition to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A11 and A12, the performance executed as a part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of transition determination by the main game performance is to be shifted to a special game state. In this way, the performance that is executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state due to the main game performance, so that it can be executed as part of the main game performance. Since the development performance destination to be played is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, it is possible to prevent the generation of discomfort caused by the repeated specification or suggestion of the performance related to the result of the transition determination executed in the main game performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the same transition determination result being made explicit or suggested.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A10 to Appendix A13, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a pseudo consecutive presentation, the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix A15]
When executing the incidental game performance, the sub-control means (51) controls whether the incidental game performance that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future occurrence event that is specified or suggested by the incidental game performance has already been executed. further comprising determining means (51) for determining whether or not the
The incidental game production execution restriction means (51) determines that the incidental game production that indicates or suggests the same event as the future occurrence event that is specified or suggested by the incidental game production has already been executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A14, characterized in that the execution of the accompanying game performance is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, when a plurality of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, the execution of the incidental game effect is restricted. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, the execution of the incidental game effect that indicates or suggests the same future event is restricted, thereby preventing the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) does not execute the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and a predetermined condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, if multiple incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event have already been executed at the stage when the incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effect is executed. Not executed. In this way, if multiple incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effect may not be executed. , execution of accompanying game effects that clearly or suggest the same future occurrence event in one notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of an accompanying game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A16, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) changes the accompanying game performance to another accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests an event different from the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and the specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, if multiple incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event have already been executed at the stage when the incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effect is executed. The game is changed to another accompanying game performance with different explicit or suggested contents and executed. In this way, if multiple incidental game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events have already been executed at the stage where a future incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effects may be By changing to and executing another incidental game performance with different suggested content, execution of an incidental game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event in one notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of an accompanying game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event. In addition, the player can obtain more information by changing from at least one incidental game effect to another incidental game effect. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A16, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) has an execution decision means (51) which decides by lottery whether or not to execute the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and the specified condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, when a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the incidental game effect is determined by lottery. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the incidental game effect is determined by lottery, so that a gameplay that allows a specific future event to be predicted based on the setting of the lottery probability of whether or not to execute the incidental game effect can be provided, thereby increasing the interest of the game. For example, by setting the lottery probability according to the result of the transition determination, a gameplay that allows a prediction of the result of the transition determination, that is, a gameplay that allows a prediction of the expectation (reliability) that the result of the transition determination will transition to a special game state, can be provided.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices A1 to A18, characterized in that, when the accompanying game performance determination means (51) has determined a plurality of accompanying game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurring event, the accompanying game performance execution limiting means (51) limits the execution of at least one of the plurality of accompanying game performances before the notification game performance is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, when multiple incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted before the notification game effect is started. In this way, when multiple incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted before the notification game effect is started, thereby preventing the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event in one notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A20]
According to appendix A19, the incidental game performance execution restriction means (51) includes redetermination means (51) for redetermining the at least one incidental game performance before the notification game performance is started. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is reset before the notification game effect is started. In this way, by resetting multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event, the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A20, wherein the redetermining means (51) redetermines the at least one incidental game performance to another incidental game performance that indicates or suggests an event different from the future event indicated or suggested by the at least one incidental game performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is re-determined to another accompanying game effect with different indicated or suggested content before the notification game effect is started. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is re-determined to another accompanying game effect with different indicated or suggested content, so that the execution of an accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests the same future event in one notification game is more suppressed. This more prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of an accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests the same future event. In addition, the player can obtain more information through the other accompanying game effect that is changed from at least one accompanying game effect, and can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing future events in the notification game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix A22]
The future event includes a plurality of events having different advantages to the player,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices A1 to A21, characterized in that when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event are determined as the future occurring event, the accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) executes the at least one incidental game effect by changing it to another incidental game effect that clearly indicates or suggests the future occurring event that is more advantageous to the player than the future occurring event clearly indicated or suggested by the at least one incidental game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the at least one incidental game performance may explicitly or suggest a future event that is more advantageous to the player than a future event that is explicitly or suggested by the at least one incidental game performance. By changing to the incidental game effect, the player can understand that the player is in an advantageous state based on future events that are specified or suggested by other incidental game effects, so that the player's interest in the progress of the game is increased. This improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix A23]
The future occurrence event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) will be a transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A22, wherein the advantage to the player in the future event is the expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, the future event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, because the future event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to a special gaming state, when the at least one associated gaming performance is changed to the other associated gaming performance, the clearly indicated or suggested content is stepped up (upgraded). As a result, a more advantageous state is expected, so the progress of the game can be more enjoyable and the interest in the game is increased.

[Appendix A24]
The special game is a first game state in which after the special game ends, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination is executed with a first probability (low probability mode). 1 special game (normal jackpot game), and after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability. A first special game (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second gaming state (probable variable jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the other incidental game performance explicitly or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the at least one associated game performance indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a first special game, and the other associated game performance indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In other words, when multiple associated game performances that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the at least one associated game performance is changed to the other associated game performance, thereby indicating or suggesting that the state is more advantageous to the player, and the indication or suggestion content of the associated game performance is stepped up (upgraded). In this way, when multiple accompanying game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future occurrence have been determined, at least one of the accompanying game effects is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting a more advantageous state for the player, and the clearly indicated or suggested content of the accompanying game effect is stepped up (upgraded), allowing the player to understand or guess that he or she is in an advantageous state, and the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the result of the transition judgment in the subsequent game progress will be a transition to special play.

[Appendix A25]
The future event includes multiple events that have commonality but differ in specificity,
When a plurality of incidental game effects that express or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event are determined, the incidental game effect execution restriction means (51) controls the at least one incidental game effect to be limited to the at least one incidental game effect. Supplementary notes A1 to Supplementary notes characterized by changing and executing another incidental game performance that clearly or suggests the future event that is more specific than the future event that is specified or suggested by the two incidental game effects. The gaming machine according to any one of A24.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A25, when a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects is set to A future event that is clearly or suggested by one incidental game performance is made clear or suggested by the incidental game performance by changing another incidental game performance that clearly or suggests a more specific future event. The content becomes concrete (detailed). As a result, the player can obtain more detailed information for inferring future events based on future events that are specified or suggested by other incidental game effects. The progress of the game can be enjoyed more, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A26]
A supplementary note characterized in that the plurality of events included in the future occurrence event have different expectations that the result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) will be transitioned to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in A25.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26, the degree of expectation that a plurality of events included in the future occurrence event will be transitioned to a special gaming state as a result of transition determination is different. In this way, multiple events included in future occurrence events have different expectations that the result of transition determination will be transitioned to a special gaming state, and therefore Therefore, it is possible to obtain information regarding a more specific level of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game more while estimating the possibility that the result of the transition determination is a transition to the special gaming state based on the information regarding the more specific expectation level, and the game progress. Interest will be improved.

[Appendix A27]
The special game is a first game state in which after the special game ends, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination is executed with a first probability (low probability mode). 1 special game (normal jackpot game), and after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability. A first special game (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second gaming state (probable variable jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A26, wherein the other incidental game performance explicitly or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27, the at least one associated game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a first special game, and the other associated game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In other words, when multiple associated game performances that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the at least one associated game performance is changed to the other associated game performance, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting that the state is more advantageous to the player, and the content clearly indicated or suggested in the associated game performance is detailed. In this way, when multiple accompanying game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future occurrence have been determined, at least one of the accompanying game effects is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting a more advantageous state for the player, and the details indicated or suggested in the accompanying game effect are detailed, allowing the player to understand or infer that the advantageous state is present, and the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to special play in the subsequent game progress.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, preview performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
The notification game performance includes a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition determination, and a future event that is executed in conjunction with the main game performance and that will occur in the future in the notification game. A gaming machine including an accompanying game performance (notice performance) that suggests (notice),
The sub-control means (51) includes:
main game performance determining means (51) for determining the main game performance;
Ancillary game production determining means (51) for determining the incidental game production;
a game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the incidental game performance;
When the incidental game performance determining means (51) has determined a plurality of incidental game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event, at least one of the plurality of incidental game performances is an accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) that restricts the execution of the game performance;
When executing the incidental game performance, determining means for determining whether or not the incidental game performance that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future occurrence event that is specified or suggested by the incidental game performance has already been executed. (51) and
has
The incidental game production execution restriction means (51) determines that the incidental game production that indicates or suggests the same event as the future occurrence event that is specified or suggested by the incidental game production has already been executed. A game machine characterized in that the execution of the accompanying game performance is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, if a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage at which an incidental game effect is to be executed, the execution of the incidental game effect is restricted. In this way, if a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage at which an incidental game effect is to be executed, the execution of the incidental game effect that clearly indicates or suggests the same future event is prevented from being executed in a single notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) does not execute the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and a predetermined condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, if multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage at which an incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effect is not executed. In this way, by not executing the incidental game effect if multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage at which an incidental game effect is to be executed, the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B2, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) changes the accompanying game performance to another accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests an event different from the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and the specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, if multiple incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when the incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effect is executed. The game is changed to another accompanying game performance with different explicit or suggested contents and executed. In this way, if multiple incidental game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events have already been executed at the stage where a future incidental game effect is to be executed, the incidental game effects may be By changing to and executing another incidental game performance with different suggested content, execution of an incidental game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event in one notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of an accompanying game performance that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event. In addition, the player can obtain more information by changing from at least one incidental game effect to another incidental game effect. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B2, characterized in that the accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) has an execution decision means (51) which decides by lottery whether or not to execute the accompanying game performance when it is determined that the accompanying game performance that indicates or suggests the same event as the future event indicated or suggested by the accompanying game performance has already been executed and the specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, when a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the incidental game effect is determined by lottery. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage when an incidental game effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the incidental game effect is determined by lottery, so that a gameplay that allows a specific future event to be predicted based on the setting of the lottery probability of whether or not to execute the incidental game effect can be provided, thereby increasing the interest of the game. For example, by setting the lottery probability according to the result of the transition determination, a gameplay that allows a prediction of the result of the transition determination, that is, a gameplay that allows a prediction of the expectation (reliability) that the result of the transition determination will transition to a special game state, can be provided.

[Appendix B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B5, wherein the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance executed as a part of the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation. In this way, because the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation, it becomes possible to recognize or identify a part of the main game presentation that will occur in the future in the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game state from the part of the main game presentation grasped from the future occurrence event, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a development presentation, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix B7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation. In this way, by the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation being a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation, the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix B8]
Supplementary note B7, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state by the main game performance. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state by the main game performance. In this way, the performance that is executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state due to the main game performance, so that it can be executed as part of the main game performance. Since the development performance destination to be played is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, it is possible to prevent the generation of discomfort caused by the repeated specification or suggestion of the performance related to the result of the transition determination executed in the main game performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the same transition determination result being made explicit or suggested.

[Appendix B9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B9, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a pseudo consecutive presentation, the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix C1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, preview performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
The notification game performance includes a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition determination, and a future event that is executed in conjunction with the main game performance and that will occur in the future in the notification game. A gaming machine including an accompanying game performance (notice performance) that suggests (notice),
The sub-control means (51) includes:
main game performance determining means (51) for determining the main game performance;
Ancillary game production determining means (51) for determining the incidental game production;
a game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the incidental game performance;
When the incidental game performance determining means (51) has determined a plurality of incidental game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event, the plurality of incidental game performances are determined before the notification game performance is started. accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) for restricting execution of at least one of the accompanying game performances;
A game machine characterized by having the following.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C1, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted before the notification game effect is started. In this way, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted before the notification game effect is started, thereby preventing the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in one notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix C2]
According to supplementary note C1, the incidental game performance execution restriction means (51) includes redetermination means (51) for redetermining the at least one incidental game performance before the notification game performance is started. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C2, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is reset before the notification game effect is started. In this way, by resetting multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event, the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game is further suppressed. This further prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C2, wherein the redetermining means (51) redetermines the at least one incidental game performance to another incidental game performance that indicates or suggests an event different from the future event indicated or suggested by the at least one incidental game performance.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C3, when multiple incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is re-determined to another incidental game effect with different indicated or suggested content before the notification game effect is started. In this way, when multiple incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is re-determined to another incidental game effect with different indicated or suggested content, so that the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event in one notification game is more suppressed. This more prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event. In addition, the player can obtain more information through the other incidental game effects that are changed from at least one incidental game effect, and can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing future events in the notification game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the future event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance executed as part of the main game performance. In this way, since the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance that will be executed as part of the main game performance, it becomes possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game performance that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will cause the transition to the special game state from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from future events. This improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is an advanced performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a development presentation, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game presentation.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C6, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation. In this way, by the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation being a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation, the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix C7]
Supplementary note C6, characterized in that the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state by the main game performance. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appended note C7, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment by the main game presentation is to transition to a special game state. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a presentation that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment by the main game presentation is to transition to a special game state, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, thereby preventing the occurrence of discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the same result of the transition judgment being indicated or suggested.

[Appendix C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C4 to C7, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a pseudo continuous performance. In this way, since the performance executed as a part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance, the execution of the pseudo-continuation performance to be performed in the main game performance is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance executed in the main game performance. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of performances with the same explicit or suggested content.

[Appendix D1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, advance notice performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
A gaming machine including, as the notification game performance, a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition judgment, and an accompanying game performance (advance notice performance) that is executed in association with the main game performance and clearly indicates or suggests (advance notice) a future occurrence event that will occur in the notification game,
The sub-control means (51)
A main game performance determination means (51) for determining the main game performance;
An associated game performance determination means (51) for determining the associated game performance;
A game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the associated game performance;
an associated game performance execution limiting means (51) for limiting execution of at least one of the plurality of associated game performances when the associated game performance determination means (51) has determined a plurality of associated game performances that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event;
having
The future event includes a plurality of events having different advantages to the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a plurality of incidental game effects which clearly indicate or suggest the same event are determined as the future occurring event, the accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) executes the at least one incidental game effect by changing it to another incidental game effect which clearly indicates or suggests the future occurring event which is more advantageous to the player than the future occurring event clearly indicated or suggested by the at least one incidental game effect.

In the gaming machine according to appended note D1, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is changed to another accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests a future event that is more advantageous to the player than the future event indicated or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is changed to another accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests a future event that is more advantageous to the player than the future event indicated or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect, thereby preventing the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event in one notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future event.

In addition, by changing the at least one associated game performance to another that indicates or suggests a future event that is more favorable to the player than the future event indicated or suggested by the at least one associated game performance, the player can understand that he or she is in an advantageous state based on the future event indicated or suggested by the other associated game performance, which increases the player's interest in the progress of the game and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2]
The future occurrence event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) will be a transition to the special game state,
A gaming machine as described in Appendix D1, characterized in that the advantage to the player in the future event is the expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, the future event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, since the future event clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to a special gaming state, when the at least one associated gaming performance is changed to the other associated gaming performance, the clearly indicated or suggested content is stepped up (upgraded). As a result, a more advantageous state is expected, so the progress of the game can be enjoyed more, and the interest in the game is increased.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the future event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation. In this way, because the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation, it becomes possible to recognize or identify a part of the main game presentation that will occur in the future in the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game state from the part of the main game presentation grasped from the future occurrence event, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine described in appendix D3, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a development presentation, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3 or D4, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to appended note D5, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation. In this way, by the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation being a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation, the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5, characterized in that the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the result of the transition determination by the main game presentation is that the player will transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment by the main game presentation is to transition to a special game state. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a presentation that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment by the main game presentation is to transition to a special game state, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, thereby preventing the occurrence of discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the same result of the transition judgment being indicated or suggested.

[Appendix D7]
The special game is a first game state in which after the special game ends, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination is executed with a first probability (low probability mode). 1 special game (normal jackpot game), and after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability. A first special game (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second gaming state (probable variable jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5 or D6, wherein the other incidental game performance explicitly or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the second special game. .

In the gaming machine according to appended note D7, the at least one associated game performance indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a first special game, and the other associated game performance indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is a transition to a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In other words, when multiple associated game performances that indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the at least one associated game performance is changed to the other associated game performance, thereby indicating or suggesting that the state is more advantageous to the player, and the indication or suggestion content of the associated game performance is stepped up (upgraded). In this way, when multiple accompanying game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future occurrence have been determined, at least one of the accompanying game effects is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting a more advantageous state for the player, and the clearly indicated or suggested content of the accompanying game effect is stepped up (upgraded), allowing the player to understand or guess that he or she is in an advantageous state, and the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the result of the transition judgment in the subsequent game progress will be a transition to special play.

[Appendix D8]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D3 to D7, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a pseudo consecutive presentation, the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, preview performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
The notification game performance includes a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition determination, and a future event that is executed in conjunction with the main game performance and that will occur in the future in the notification game. A gaming machine including an accompanying game performance (notice performance) that suggests (notice),
The sub-control means (51) includes:
main game performance determining means (51) for determining the main game performance;
Ancillary game production determining means (51) for determining the incidental game production;
a game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the incidental game performance;
When the incidental game performance determining means (51) has determined a plurality of incidental game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event, at least one of the plurality of incidental game performances is an accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) that restricts the execution of the game performance;
has
The future event includes multiple events that have commonality but differ in specificity,
When a plurality of incidental game effects that express or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event are determined, the incidental game effect execution restriction means (51) controls the at least one incidental game effect to be limited to the at least one incidental game effect. A gaming machine that changes and executes another incidental game performance that clearly or suggests a future event that is more specific than the future event that is specified or suggested by one of the incidental game performances.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note E1, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is executed by changing another accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests a more specific future occurrence event than the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is executed by changing another accompanying game effect that indicates or suggests a more specific future occurrence event than the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect, thereby preventing the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future occurrence event in one notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future occurrence event, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of accompanying game effects that indicate or suggest the same future occurrence event.

In addition, when multiple associated game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, at least one of the multiple associated game effects is changed to another associated game effect that clearly indicates or suggests a more specific future event than the future event clearly indicated or suggested by the at least one associated game effect, thereby making the content clearly indicated or suggested by the associated game effect more concrete (detailed). This allows the player to obtain more detailed information for inferring a future event based on the future event clearly indicated or suggested by the other associated game effects, and therefore allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game more based on this detailed information, increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the multiple events included in the future occurrence events have different expectations that the result of the transition judgment by the main control means (41) will be a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, a plurality of events included in the future occurrence event have different expectations that the result of the transition determination will be transitioned to the special gaming state. In this way, multiple events included in future occurrence events have different expectations that the result of transition determination will be transitioned to a special gaming state, and therefore Therefore, it is possible to obtain information regarding a more specific level of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game more while estimating the possibility that the result of the transition determination is a transition to the special gaming state based on the information regarding the more specific expectation level, and the game progress. Interest will be improved.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or E2, wherein the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance executed as a part of the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance executed as part of the main game performance. In this way, since the future occurrence event is an event related to a performance that will be executed as part of the main game performance, it becomes possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game performance that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will cause the transition to the special game state from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from future events. This improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine described in appendix E3, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is the advanced performance. In this way, since the performance performed as a part of the main game performance is a development performance, the development performance destination to be performed in the main game performance is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested. This prevents discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of the development performance to be performed. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of performances with the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E3 or E4, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation. In this way, by the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation being a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation, the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix E6]
Supplementary note E5, characterized in that the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state by the main game performance. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state by the main game performance. In this way, the performance that is executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state due to the main game performance, so that it can be executed as part of the main game performance. Since the development performance destination to be played is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, it is possible to prevent the generation of discomfort caused by the repeated specification or suggestion of the performance related to the result of the transition determination executed in the main game performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the same transition determination result being made explicit or suggested.

[Appendix E7]
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot game) which is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, and a first special game (probability jackpot game) which is shifted to a second game state (probability jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) which is higher than the first probability after the special game is ended,
The at least one associated game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is that the first special game will be transitioned to,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the other associated game presentation explicitly or implies that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, the at least one incidental game performance clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the first special game, and the other incidental game performance is , which clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. That is, when a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, the at least one incidental game effect is changed to the other incidental game effect, thereby making the game more enjoyable. It is specified or suggested that the player is in an advantageous state, and the details of the specification or suggestion in the accompanying game performance are detailed. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game performances that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, by changing the at least one incidental game performance to the other incidental game performance, By clearly indicating or suggesting that the situation is advantageous to the player, and by making the details of the specification or suggestion in the accompanying game effects more detailed, the player can grasp or infer that the situation is advantageous. In the progress of the game, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to the special game.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E3 to E7, wherein the performance executed as a part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance. In this way, since the performance executed as a part of the main game performance is a pseudo-continuous performance, the execution of the pseudo-continuation performance to be performed in the main game performance is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance executed in the main game performance. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to execution of performances with the same explicit or suggested content.

[Appendix F1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, advance notice performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
A gaming machine including, as the notification game performance, a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition judgment, and an accompanying game performance (advance notice performance) that is executed in association with the main game performance and clearly indicates or suggests (advance notice) a future occurrence event that will occur in the notification game,
The sub-control means (51)
A main game performance determination means (51) for determining the main game performance;
An associated game performance determination means (51) for determining the associated game performance;
A game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the associated game performance;
an associated game performance execution limiting means (51) for limiting execution of at least one of the plurality of associated game performances when the associated game performance determination means (51) has determined a plurality of associated game performances that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event;
having
The future event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted. In this way, when multiple incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, the execution of at least one of the multiple incidental game effects is restricted, thereby preventing the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event in a single notification game. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of incidental game effects that clearly indicate or suggest the same future event.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation. In this way, because the future occurrence event is an event related to a presentation executed as part of the main game presentation, it becomes possible to recognize or identify a part of the main game presentation that will occur in the future in the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game state from the part of the main game presentation grasped from the future occurrence event, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is an advanced performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a development presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a development presentation, the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the destination of the development presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game performance.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation. In this way, by the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation being a presentation related to the result of the transition judgment notified by the main game presentation, the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the presentation related to the result of the transition judgment being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix F4]
Supplementary note F3, wherein the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state by the main game performance. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix F5]
The special game is a first game state in which, after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is performed with a first probability (low probability mode) and a first game state (normal jackpot game state). 1 special game (normal jackpot game), and after the end of the special game, the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability. A first special game (probable variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second gaming state (probable variable jackpot game state),
The performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the second special game state, as described in appendix F4. Game machine.

In the game machines according to appendices F4 and F5, the performance executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state by the main game performance. In this way, the performance that is executed as part of the main game performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to a special game state due to the main game performance, so that it can be executed as part of the main game performance. Since the development performance destination to be played is prevented from being repeatedly specified or suggested, it is possible to prevent the generation of discomfort caused by the repeated specification or suggestion of the performance related to the result of the transition determination executed in the main game performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the same transition determination result being made explicit or suggested.

[Appendix F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, wherein the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F6, the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation is a pseudo consecutive presentation. In this way, by having the presentation executed as part of the main game presentation be a pseudo consecutive presentation, the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation is prevented from being repeatedly indicated or suggested, and therefore discomfort caused by the execution of the pseudo consecutive presentation executed in the main game presentation being repeatedly indicated or suggested is prevented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the execution of presentations with the same indicated or suggested content.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
A sub-control means (51) for controlling the notification game performance (variable game performance, preview performance) executed in the notification game;
Equipped with
The notification game performance includes a main game performance (variable game performance) that notifies the result of the transition determination, and a future event that is executed in conjunction with the main game performance and that will occur in the future in the notification game. A gaming machine including an accompanying game performance (notice performance) that suggests (notice),
The sub-control means (51)
main game performance determining means (51) for determining the main game performance;
Ancillary game production determining means (51) for determining the incidental game production;
a game performance execution means (51) for executing the main game performance and the incidental game performance;
When the incidental game performance determining means (51) has determined a plurality of incidental game performances that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event, at least one of the plurality of incidental game performances is an accompanying game performance execution restriction means (51) that restricts the execution of the game performance;
has
The incidental game performance execution limiting means (51) is configured to control the incidental game performance execution restricting means (51) when the plurality of incidental game performances that specify or suggest the same event as the future occurrence event are determined. A gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, execution of the accompanying game performance is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects is determined. Execution of accompanying game effects is restricted. In this way, when a plurality of incidental game effects that specify or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, execution of at least one of the plurality of incidental game effects is restricted. , execution of accompanying game performances that explicitly or suggest the same future occurrence event in one notification game is suppressed. As a result, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of ancillary game performances that clearly or suggest the same future occurrence event, the incidental game that clearly or suggests the same future occurrence event is suppressed. A decrease in interest in the game due to execution of the performance is prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, execution of the at least one accompanying game performance is restricted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the execution of the at least one incidental game performance is restricted on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby creating a situation where the execution of the at least one incidental game performance is restricted according to the predetermined condition that is set. It can provide variety. Such diversity makes it possible to add variety to the gaming performance of the gaming machine, thereby making it possible to improve gaming interest.

[Appendix G2]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a future occurrence event that is different from the future occurrence event specified or suggested by the incidental game performance determined by the incidental game performance determination means. The gaming machine according to appendix G1, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appended note G2, the predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a predetermined future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means. In this way, the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a predetermined future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means, so that it is possible to restrict the execution of the at least one associated game performance by changing the at least one associated game performance to another associated game performance that indicates or suggests the predetermined future occurrence event. In this way, by changing the at least one associated game performance to another associated game performance that indicates or suggests the predetermined future occurrence event, it is possible to provide information on a new future occurrence event that is not indicated or suggested by the associated game performance determined by the associated game performance determination means. This increases the amount of information available to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the progress of the game based on the newly obtained information, and increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) causes the transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, since the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to the special gaming state, when the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to the special gaming state, there is a possibility that the at least one associated gaming performance will be executed. In other words, when multiple associated gaming performances including the same explicit or suggested content are executed, there is a possibility that the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to the special gaming state. This can increase the sense of expectation that the result of the transition judgment will cause a transition to the special gaming state when multiple associated gaming performances including the same explicit or suggested content are executed, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

[Appendix G4]
The associated game performance execution restriction means (51) has an execution decision means (51) for deciding by lottery whether or not to execute the at least one associated game performance,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 or Appendix G3, characterized in that the specified condition is that in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51), it is determined that at least one of the associated game effects will not be executed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the predetermined condition is that it is determined by lottery that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed. In this way, the predetermined condition is that it is determined by lottery that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the execution of the at least one associated game performance will be restricted by lottery. Furthermore, depending on the probability that it is determined by lottery that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed, it is possible to add variety to the restriction on the execution of the at least one associated game performance. As a result, it is possible to add variety to the playability of the gaming machine, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

[Appendix G5]
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot game) which is shifted to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, and a first special game (probability jackpot game) which is shifted to a second game state (probability jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a second probability (high probability mode) which is higher than the first probability after the special game is ended,
The result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) includes a first determination result (normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the notification game, and a second determination result (variable jackpot game) in which the game state is transitioned to the second game state after the end of the notification game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G4, characterized in that the probability of determining that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51) differs between a case where the result of the transition judgment is the first judgment result and a case where the result of the transition judgment is the second judgment result.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game performance is determined not to be executed is determined based on whether the result of the transition determination is a first determination result disadvantageous to the player and the result of the transition determination. This is different depending on the case where the second determination result is advantageous to the player. In this way, the decision probability that it is determined that the at least one accompanying game performance is not executed is determined based on the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player, and the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player. By being different from the case where the second determination result is advantageous, it is possible to provide a gameplay feature in which future occurrence events can be guessed based on the set decision probability, thereby improving the interest of the game. For example, by setting the decision probability according to the result of the transition determination, it is possible to predict the result of the transition determination, that is, the expectation that the result of the transition determination will be transferred to a special gaming state ( It is possible to provide gameplay that can be estimated (reliability).

[Appendix G6]
According to appendix G5, the decision probability is higher when the result of the transition determination is the first determination result than when the result of the transition determination is the second determination result. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, the probability of determining that the at least one associated game performance will not be executed is higher when the transition judgment result is the first judgment result that is unfavorable to the player than when the transition judgment result is the second judgment result that is favorable to the player. In this way, the probability of determination is higher when the transition judgment result is the first judgment result that is unfavorable to the player than when the transition judgment result is the second judgment result that is favorable to the player, and the execution of the at least one associated game performance provides a gameplay that increases the expectation (reliability) that the transition judgment result will be a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix H1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification performances (preview performances);
A notification performance execution decision means (51) for deciding whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification performances;
A notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determination means (51);
a display performance execution means (51) for executing a display performance (e.g., a development performance) of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification performance of the predetermined notification content after the notification performance is executed when the notification performance (e.g., a development performance notice performance) of the predetermined notification content is executed;
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
A means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
A means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
having
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, a means is provided for executing, as the notification performance, a notification performance having notification content that includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect is executed, so that when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification effect, the additional performance information can be obtained. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the performance executed in the notification game based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also the additional performance information (performance information), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the additional performance information includes information related to the display performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information related to the display performance, the player can obtain not only the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, but also information related to the display performance included as the additional performance information (performance information). As a result, the player can obtain not only the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, but also information related to the display performance based on the additional performance information, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while anticipating the display performance executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the display effect is determined based on the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H3, the display effect is determined based on the result of the transition determination. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the display effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the display performance determined based on the result of the transition determination, the player can not only check the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the additional performance information (performance). information) regarding the display effect related to the transition determination result. As a result, the player can know in advance the display performance that will be determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional performance information, so that the result of the transition determination will be shifted to the special gaming state based on this display performance. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of whether there is a game or not, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, from when the variable display of a plurality of symbols starts until the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed. including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in combination;
The gaming machine according to appendix H3, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4, the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can check not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the additional performance information (performance You can obtain information regarding the reach effect related to the result of the transition determination included as (information). As a result, the player can know in advance the reach performance that is determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional performance information, so that the result of the transition determination will be shifted to the special gaming state based on this reach performance. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the game will be the same, the game becomes more interesting.

[Appendix H5]
The display performance includes a pseudo-connection performance,
The gaming machine according to either appendix H3 or H4, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5, the additional performance information includes information regarding a pseudo-continuous performance determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance determined based on the result of the transition determination, the player can not only check the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the additional performance information ( It is possible to obtain information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance related to the result of the transition determination included in the performance information). As a result, the player can know in advance the pseudo-continuous performance that is determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional performance information, so that the result of the transition determination will be shifted to the special gaming state based on this pseudo-continuous performance. Since the user can enjoy the progress of the notification game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the game will be the same, the game becomes more interesting.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H1 to H5, wherein the additional performance information includes information indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, the additional performance information includes information indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state. In this way, by including the information that the result of the transition determination causes the player to move to the special gaming state, the additional performance information allows the player to receive information not only about the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also from the additional performance. It is possible to obtain information indicating that the result of the transition determination included as information (performance information) is to transition to a special gaming state. Thereby, the player can know in advance that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, so he can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H6, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding a performance to be executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H7, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed with notification contents including the effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect as additional effect information related to the effect executed after the second timing. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect with notification contents including the effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect as additional effect information related to the effect executed after the second timing is executed, so that when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification contents of the specific type of notification effect, information on the effect executed after the second timing can be obtained as additional effect information. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the effect executed in the notification game based on not only the notification contents of the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect information), thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to appendix H7, wherein the additional performance information includes information that can specify the content of the performance to be executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H8, the additional performance information includes information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing can be obtained. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the performance that will be executed in the notification game based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, but also the performance specified from the additional performance information (performance information), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix H9]
The display effects include a reach effect indicating that the multiple symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state during the period from when the variable display of the multiple symbols is started to when the multiple symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H9, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9, the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can check not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the additional performance information (performance You can obtain information on reach performance based on information). As a result, the player can specify in advance that a reach effect will be executed based on the additional effect information, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the alert game while assuming the reach effect that will be executed in the alert game. The interest of people is improved.

[Appendix H10]
The reach effect includes multiple types of reach effects that are executed in stages,
The gaming machine according to appendix H9, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding stages of the plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, the additional performance information includes information regarding stages of multiple kinds of ready-to-win performances. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the stages of multiple types of ready-to-reach performances, it is possible to specify in advance which stage of the ready-to-reach performance will be executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming the stage of the reach effect executed in the notification game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H11]
The reach performance includes a plurality of reach performances,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H10, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the types of the plurality of reach performances.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11, the additional performance information includes information regarding the types of multiple reach performances. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the types of multiple reach performances, it is possible to specify in advance which type of reach performance will be executed. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed while predicting the type of reach performance that will be executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H12]
The notification performance execution means (51) or the display performance execution means (51) includes mutually related related performances that are executed up to an upper limit set to 2 or more,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H9 to H11, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of times the related performance is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H12, the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of times related performances that are executed relative to each other are executed up to a maximum number. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of times related performances that are executed relative to each other are executed up to a maximum number, it is possible to specify in advance to what stage the related performances will be executed. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming what stage the related performances executed in the notification game will be, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H13]
The notification performance includes a step-up performance,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H12, wherein the number of times the related performance is executed is the number of steps in the step-up performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13, the number of times the related effect is executed is the number of steps in the step-up effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of steps in the step-up effect as the related effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of steps in the step-up effect as the related effect, it is possible to specify in advance that a step-up effect will be executed and the number of steps in the step-up effect. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed while estimating the number of steps in the step-up effect executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H14]
The display effects include pseudo consecutive effects,
The gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the number of times the related effects are executed is the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14, the number of times the related effect is executed is the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect as the related effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect as the related effect, it is possible to specify in advance that the pseudo consecutive win effect will be executed and the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed by estimating the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H15]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices H1 to H14, characterized in that the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. In this way, by displaying the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing in a manner that is distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific type of notification effect and to draw attention to the specific type of notification effect by creating a sense of incongruity. This makes it easier for the player to understand that additional information is being presented.

[Appendix H16]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing may be displayed in a manner different from that of the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine as described in appendix H15.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H16, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which the display mode of a part of the effect is different from that of the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which the display mode of a part of the effect is different from that of the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing, so that the display mode of the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing can be made different while maintaining its identity from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. This makes it possible to sufficiently attract the player's attention to the specific type of notification effect and to draw attention to the specific type of notification effect by creating a sufficient sense of incongruity.

[Appendix H17]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of a color, a pattern, and a background of a part of the effect. The gaming machine according to appendix H16, characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which at least one of the color, pattern, and background of a part of the effect is different from that of the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which at least one of the color, pattern, and background of a part of the effect is different from that of the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing, so that a simple change in the display mode can sufficiently attract the player's attention to the specific type of notification effect, and by creating a clear sense of incongruity, it is possible to draw attention to the specific type of notification effect.

[Appendix H18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H16 or Appendix H17, characterized in that the specific type of notification performance executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined display is added to the specific type of notification performance executed at the first timing.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H18, wherein the predetermined display is an effect display.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H18 and H19, the specific type of notification performance executed at the second timing adds a predetermined display such as an effect display to the specific type of notification performance executed at the first timing. It will be displayed in the following manner. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined display such as an effect display is added to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. By simply changing the display mode, it is possible to sufficiently draw the player's attention to a specific type of notification performance, and by creating a clear sense of discomfort, it is possible to draw attention to the specific type of notification performance.
[Appendix H20]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H19, wherein the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H20, the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content of the specific type of notification performance. In this way, since the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, a gameplay is provided in which advantageous additional performance information can be obtained when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing.

[Appendix H21]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H20, wherein the additional performance information includes information related to the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H21, the additional performance information includes information related to transition determination. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information related to the transition determination, the player can make the transition determination based on the information regarding the display performance related to the result of the transition determination included as the additional performance information (performance information). The player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the result will lead to a transition to the special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H22]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, from when the variable display of a plurality of symbols starts until the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed. including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in combination;
The gaming machine according to appendix H20 or H21, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H22, the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance, the player can obtain not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the information regarding the reach performance included as the additional performance information (performance information). can. As a result, the player can know in advance that a reach effect will be executed based on the additional effect information, and therefore, based on this reach effect, the player can determine whether or not the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special gaming state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H23]
The display effects include pseudo consecutive effects,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H20 to Appendix H22, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo consecutive performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H23, the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance, the player can receive not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the information regarding the pseudo-continuation performance included as the additional performance information (performance information). can be obtained. As a result, the player can know in advance that a pseudo-continuous performance will be executed based on the additional performance information, so whether the result of the transition determination is that the transition to the special gaming state is based on this pseudo-continuous performance? Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility of failure (expectation level), the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H24]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix H20 to Appendix H23, wherein the additional performance information includes information indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

[Appendix H25]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game state in which a second special game (variable jackpot game) that is more advantageous to a player than the first special game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H24, wherein the additional performance information includes information notifying that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H24 and H25, the additional performance information includes information regarding the result of the transition determination to cause the game to transition to a special gaming state such as the second special gaming state. In this way, the additional performance information includes information that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can understand that the result of the transition determination for the notification game causes the transition to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to know during execution of the notification game that a special game will be executed after the notification game ends. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the additional performance information, and can also watch the progress of the notification game looking forward to the execution of the special game. In particular, when the additional performance information includes information that the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, the second special gaming state is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can look forward to the execution of the second special game and watch the progress of the notification game.

[Appendix H26]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H25, further comprising a restriction means for restricting the execution of the specific type of notification presentation at a third timing when a predetermined condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H26, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, execution of a specific type of notification effect at the third timing is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of a specific type of notification effect at the third timing, the player is freed from the annoyance and irritation caused by the repeated execution of a specific type of notification effect. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix H27]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H26, wherein the restriction means, when the predetermined condition is established, executes an effect different from the specific type of notification effect instead of the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H27, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a performance different from the specific type of notification performance is executed instead of the specific type of notification performance. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, a performance different from the specific type of notification performance is executed instead of the specific type of notification performance, so that the progress of the notification game is further improved based on this performance. can be enjoyed.

[Appendix H28]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H27, wherein the different presentation is a notification presentation different from the specific type of notification presentation among the multiple types of notification presentations.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H28, the different performance executed in place of the specific type of notification performance is a notification performance different from the specific type of notification performance among the plurality of types of notification performances. In this way, the different performance that is executed instead of the specific type of notification performance is a notification performance that is different from the specific type of notification performance among the multiple types of notification effects, so that multiple types of notification effects can be performed with respect to the display performance. You can obtain different information. With this different information, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming the display effect.

[Appendix H29]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H27 or Appendix H28, wherein the different presentation is a presentation different from the plurality of types of notification presentations.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H29, the different performance executed in place of the specific type of notification performance is a notification performance different from the plurality of types of notification performances. In this way, the different effects executed instead of the specific type of information effect are different from the plurality of types of information effects, so that various information can be provided by the different effects. This makes it possible to provide various types of gameplay by appropriately setting the information provided by different effects.

[Appendix H30]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H26 to Appendix H29, wherein the predetermined condition is the presence of an unannounced performance that is executed after the third timing in the annunciation game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H30, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced performance that is executed after the third timing in the notifying game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced performance that will be executed after the third timing in the notification game, so instead of the specific type of notification performance, the notification performance regarding the unannounced performance will be executed. becomes possible to execute. As a result, as in the case where additional performance information is presented, the player can play the notification game assuming the performance to be executed in the notification game based on the information specified from the notification performance regarding the unannounced performance. Since the player can enjoy the progress, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H31]
The gaming machine according to appendix H30, wherein the unannounced performance is the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H31, the unannounced performance is a display performance. That is, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced display effect that is executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced display performance that will be executed after the third timing in the notification game, so that the unannounced display performance can be used instead of the specific type of notification performance. It becomes possible to execute notification effects. As a result, the player assumes the display performance to be executed in the notification game based on the information specified from the notification performance regarding the unannounced display performance, and the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of something.

[Appendix H32]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H26 to H31, wherein the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H32, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state, so that when the execution of a specific type of notification presentation is restricted at the third timing, the anticipation that the result of the transition determination will transition to a special gaming state can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H33]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H32, wherein the additional performance information is information related to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H33, the additional performance information is information related to the notification content in a specific type of notification performance. In this way, since the additional performance information is information related to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, the player can perform a display performance that is more advantageous than the display performance understood from the specific type of notification performance. This can be understood from the additional performance information. This allows the player to understand that the possibility (expectation level) that the result of the transition determination based on the additional performance information is that the transition will be made to the special gaming state is higher than what can be ascertained from the specific type of notification performance. Since this can be recognized, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to the special gaming state.

[Appendix H34]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, from when the variable display of a plurality of symbols starts until the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed. including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in combination;
The gaming machine according to appendix H33, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the ready-to-win performance will be executed as the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H34, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, since the notification performance of a specific type is a performance that notifies that a reach performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information regarding the reach performance specified from the notification performance of the specific type, the reach performance concerned Additional information can be obtained from additional performance information. Thereby, the player can know the content of the ready-to-win performance in more detail, and therefore can further enjoy the progress of the notification game assuming the ready-to-win performance executed in the notification game.

[Appendix H35]
The display performance includes a pseudo-connection performance,
The gaming machine according to appendix H33 or H34, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the pseudo continuous performance will be executed as the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H35, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, because the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information about the pseudo consecutive performance specified from the specific type of notification effect, further information about the pseudo consecutive performance can be obtained from the additional performance information. This allows the player to know the content of the pseudo consecutive performance in more detail, and thus further enjoy the progress of the notification game, assuming that it will be executed in the notification game.

[Appendix H36]
The display performance includes a transition notification performance indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H33 to H35, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the transition notification performance will be executed as the display performance.

[Appendix H37]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game (probable jackpot game) more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. a second special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to appendix H36, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H36 and Supplementary Note H37, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special game state such as the second special game state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player can understand during the execution of the notification game that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game is to transition to a special game state and that the special game will be executed after the end of the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and can watch the progress of the notification game with excitement for the special game to be executed. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, the player can watch the progress of the notification game with excitement for the second special game to be executed because it is in a more advantageous state.

[Appendix H38]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H37, characterized in that a notification performance of notification content including the additional performance information is executed when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H38, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed when a specific type of notification effect is executed at a first timing. That is, when a specific type of notification effect executed at a first timing is also executed at a second timing, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect executed at a first timing is also executed at a second timing, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed, thereby freeing the player from the annoyance and frustration caused by the specific type of notification effect being executed repeatedly, and thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

[Appendix H39]
The display effects include a reach effect indicating that the multiple symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state during the period from when the variable display of the multiple symbols is started to when the multiple symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H38, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect will be executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H39, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, since the notification performance of a specific type is a performance that notifies that a reach performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information regarding the reach performance specified from the notification performance of the specific type, the reach performance concerned Additional information can be obtained from additional performance information. Thereby, the player can know the content of the ready-to-win performance in more detail, and therefore can further enjoy the progress of the notification game assuming the ready-to-win performance executed in the notification game.

[Appendix H40]
The display effects include pseudo consecutive effects,
The gaming machine according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H40, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, because the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information about the pseudo consecutive performance specified from the specific type of notification effect, further information about the pseudo consecutive performance can be obtained from the additional performance information. This allows the player to know the content of the pseudo consecutive performance in more detail, and thus further enjoy the progress of the notification game, assuming that it will be executed in the notification game.

[Appendix H41]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H39 to Appendix H40, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the transition notification effect will be executed as the display effect.

[Appendix H42]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game state in which a second special game (variable jackpot game) that is more advantageous to a player than the first special game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H41, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H41 and H42, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to shift to a special gaming state such as the second special gaming state. In this way, since the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to move to a special game state such as the second special game state, the player can The result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game state, and it can be grasped during execution of the notification game that the special game will be executed after the notification game ends. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification performance, and can also enjoy the progress of the notification game while looking forward to the execution of the special game. You can watch over it. In particular, if the specific type of notification performance is a performance in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, Therefore, the player can look forward to the execution of the second special game and watch the progress of the notification game.

[Appendix I1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification performances (preview performances);
A notification performance execution decision means (51) for deciding whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification performances;
A notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determination means (51);
a display performance execution means (51) for executing a display performance (e.g., a development performance) of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification performance of the predetermined notification content after the notification performance is executed when the notification performance (e.g., a development performance notice performance) of the predetermined notification content is executed;
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
A means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
A means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
having
a means for executing a notification performance of a notification content including, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing, as the notification performance when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing;
The additional performance information includes information regarding a performance to be executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed with notification content including the effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information related to the effect executed after the second timing. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect with notification content including the effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information related to the effect executed after the second timing is executed, so that when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification effect, information on the effect executed after the second timing can be obtained as additional effect information. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the effect executed in the notification game based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect information), thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1, wherein the additional performance information includes information capable of identifying the content of the performance to be executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, the additional performance information includes information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, information that can identify the content of the performance that will be executed after the second timing can be obtained. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the performance that will be executed in the notification game based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, but also the performance specified from the additional performance information (performance information), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix I3]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, from when the variable display of a plurality of symbols starts until the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed. including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in combination;
The gaming machine according to appendix I2, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance that is determined based on the result of the transition judgment. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance that is determined based on the result of the transition judgment, the player can obtain not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also information regarding the reach performance based on the additional performance information (performance information). This allows the player to specify in advance that a reach performance will be executed based on the additional performance information, and therefore allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game while anticipating the reach performance executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I4]
The reach effect includes multiple types of reach effects that are executed in stages,
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding stages of the plurality of types of reach performances.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, the additional performance information includes information regarding the stages of multiple types of reach performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the stages of multiple types of reach performance, it is possible to specify in advance which stage of the reach performance will be executed. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed while anticipating the stage of the reach performance executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I5]
The reach performance includes multiple types of reach performances,
The gaming machine according to appendix I4, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding types of the plurality of types of reach performances.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the additional performance information includes information regarding the types of multiple reach performances. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the types of multiple reach performances, it is possible to specify in advance which type of reach performance will be executed. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed while predicting the type of reach performance that will be executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I6]
The notification performance execution means (51) or the display performance execution means (51) includes mutually related related performances that are executed up to an upper limit set to 2 or more,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I3 to I5, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of times the related performance is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of executions of mutually related related performances that are executed up to the upper limit number. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of executions of mutually related related effects that are executed up to the upper limit, it is possible to specify in advance up to which stage the related effects will be executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while considering the stage of the related performance executed in the notification game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I7]
The notification performance includes a step-up performance,
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6, wherein the number of times the related performance is executed is the number of steps in the step-up performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7, the number of executions of the related performance is the number of steps of the step-up performance. That is, the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of steps of the step-up performance as the related performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the number of steps in the step-up performance as the related performance, it is possible to specify in advance that the step-up performance will be executed and the number of steps in the step-up performance. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming the number of steps of the step-up performance to be executed in the notification game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I8]
The display performance includes a pseudo-connection performance,
The gaming machine according to appendix I6 or I7, wherein the number of executions of the related performance is the number of pseudo-continuations of the pseudo-continuation performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, the number of times the related effect is executed is the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect as the related effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect as the related effect, it is possible to specify in advance that the pseudo consecutive win effect will be executed and the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect. This allows the progress of the notification game to be enjoyed while estimating the number of pseudo consecutive wins of the pseudo consecutive win effect executed in the notification game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix J1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
Notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing multiple types of notification performances (notification performances);
notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects;
notification content determining means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determining means (51);
When the notification effect of a predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed, after the execution of the notification effect, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed. display effect execution means (51) for executing the effect);
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is later than the first timing during execution of the notification game;
has
When the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content includes performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing as additional performance information. Equipped with a means to carry out notification performance,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific type of notification performance executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from the specific type of notification performance executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing as the notification performance is transferred to the second timing. The notification performance of the notification content included as additional performance information regarding the performance to be executed thereafter is executed. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information that was not announced in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is changed to the effect information that was not announced in the notification effect executed at the second timing or later. By executing the notification performance of the notification content included as additional performance information regarding the performance, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, Information regarding the performance to be executed after the second timing can be obtained as additional performance information. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game by assuming the performance to be executed in the notification game based not only on the notification content of the specific type of notification performance but also on the additional performance information (performance information). This improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix J1, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. By attracting the player's attention and creating a sense of discomfort, it is possible to draw attention to a specific type of notification effect. This makes it easier for the player to understand that additional information is being presented.

[Appendix J2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, characterized in that the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that differs from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in the display manner of a part of the effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which a part of the presentation is displayed differently from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. Ru. In this way, the specific type of notification performance that is executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner that partially differs from the specific type of notification performance that is executed at the first timing. The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing can be displayed in a different manner while maintaining the same identity as the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. Thereby, it is possible to sufficiently attract the player's attention to the specific type of notification performance and create a sufficient sense of discomfort, thereby making it possible to draw attention to the specific type of notification performance.

[Appendix J3]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of a color, a pattern, and a background of a part of the effect. The gaming machine according to appendix J2, characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing at least in part of the color, pattern, and background of the effect. One is displayed in a different manner. In this manner, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of the color, pattern, and background of a part of the effect. By simply changing the display mode, it is possible to sufficiently draw the attention of players to a specific type of notification effect, and to draw attention to the specific type of notification effect by creating a clear sense of discomfort. Become.

[Appendix J4]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined display is added to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine described in Appendix J2 or Appendix J3.

[Appendix J5]
The gaming machine according to appendix J4, wherein the predetermined display is an effect display.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix J4 and Appendix J5, the specific type of notification performance executed at the second timing adds a predetermined display such as an effect display to the specific type of notification performance executed at the first timing. It will be displayed in the following manner. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined display such as an effect display is added to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. By simply changing the display mode, it is possible to sufficiently draw the player's attention to a specific type of notification performance, and by creating a clear sense of discomfort, it is possible to draw attention to the specific type of notification performance.

[Appendix K1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
Notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing multiple types of notification performances (notification performances);
notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects;
notification content determining means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determining means (51);
When the notification effect of a predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed, after the execution of the notification effect, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed. display effect execution means (51) for executing the effect);
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
has
When the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content includes performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing as additional performance information. Equipped with a means to carry out notification performance,
The gaming machine characterized in that the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification performance.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K1, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect is executed, so that when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification effect, the additional performance information can be obtained. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the performance executed in the notification game based not only on the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also on the additional performance information (performance information), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix K1, the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification performance. In this way, since the additional performance information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, the additional performance is advantageous when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing. A game feature of being able to obtain information is provided.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, wherein the additional performance information includes information related to the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the additional performance information includes information related to transition determination. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information related to the transition determination, the player can make the transition determination based on the information regarding the display performance related to the result of the transition determination included as the additional performance information (performance information). The player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the result will lead to a transition to the special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix K3]
The display effects include a reach effect indicating that the multiple symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state during the period from when the variable display of the multiple symbols is started to when the multiple symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the additional performance information includes information regarding the ready-to-win performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the reach performance, the player can obtain not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the information regarding the reach performance included as the additional performance information (performance information). can. As a result, the player can know in advance that a reach effect will be executed based on the additional effect information, and therefore, based on this reach effect, the player can determine whether or not the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special gaming state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix K4]
The display performance includes a pseudo-connection performance,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K3, wherein the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, the additional performance information includes information regarding a pseudo-continuous performance. In this way, since the additional performance information includes information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance, the player can receive not only the notification content of a specific type of notification performance, but also the information regarding the pseudo-continuation performance included as the additional performance information (performance information). can be obtained. As a result, the player can know in advance that a pseudo-continuous performance will be executed based on the additional performance information, so whether the result of the transition determination is that the transition to the special gaming state is based on this pseudo-continuous performance? Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility of failure (expectation level), the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K4, wherein the additional performance information includes information indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

[Appendix K6]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game (probable jackpot game) more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. a second special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to appendix K5, wherein the additional performance information includes information notifying that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices K5 and K6, the additional performance information includes information regarding the result of the transition determination to cause the game to transition to a special gaming state such as the second special gaming state. In this way, the additional performance information includes information that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can understand that the result of the transition determination for the notification game causes the transition to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to know during execution of the notification game that a special game will be executed after the notification game ends. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the additional performance information, and can also watch the progress of the notification game looking forward to the execution of the special game. In particular, when the additional performance information includes information that the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, the second special gaming state is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can look forward to the execution of the second special game and watch the progress of the notification game.

[Appendix L1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
Notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing multiple types of notification performances (notification performances);
notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects;
notification content determining means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determining means (51);
When the notification effect of a predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed, after the execution of the notification effect, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed. display effect execution means (51) for executing the effect);
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
has
When the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content includes performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing as additional performance information. Equipped with a means to carry out notification performance,
A gaming machine further comprising a restriction means for restricting execution of the specific type of notification performance at a third timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L1, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing is included as additional performance information as the notification performance. A notification presentation of the notification content is executed. In this way, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content is notified as additional performance information that includes performance information that was not announced in the notification performance executed at the first timing. By executing the performance, when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, additional performance information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game by assuming the performance to be executed in the notification game based not only on the notification content of the specific type of notification performance but also on the additional performance information (performance information). This improves the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix L1, when a predetermined condition is met, the execution of a specific type of notification effect at the third timing is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of a specific type of notification effect at the third timing, the player is freed from the annoyance and frustration caused by the repeated execution of a specific type of notification effect, and a decline in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix L2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1, characterized in that when the specified condition is satisfied, the restriction means executes an effect different from the specific type of notification effect instead of the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a performance different from the specific type of notification performance is executed instead of the specific type of notification performance. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, a performance different from the specific type of notification performance is executed instead of the specific type of notification performance, so that the progress of the notification game is further improved based on this performance. can be enjoyed.

[Appendix L3]
The gaming machine according to appendix L2, wherein the different performance is a notification performance different from the specific type of notification performance among the plurality of types of notification performances.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L3, the different presentation executed in place of the specific type of notification presentation is a notification presentation different from the specific type of notification presentation among the multiple types of notification presentations. In this way, because the different presentation executed in place of the specific type of notification presentation is a notification presentation different from the specific type of notification presentation among the multiple types of notification presentations, it is possible to obtain information different from the multiple types of notification presentations regarding the display presentation. This different information allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game while anticipating the display presentation.

[Appendix L4]
The gaming machine according to appendix L2 or L3, wherein the different performance is a performance different from the plurality of types of notification performances.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L4, the different performance executed in place of the specific type of notification performance is a notification performance different from the plurality of types of notification performances. In this way, the different effects executed instead of the specific type of information effect are different from the plurality of types of information effects, so that various information can be provided by the different effects. This makes it possible to provide various types of gameplay by appropriately setting the information provided by different effects.

[Appendix L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced performance that is executed after the third timing in the notifying game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L5, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced performance that is executed after the third timing in the notifying game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced performance that will be executed after the third timing in the notification game, so instead of the specific type of notification performance, the notification performance regarding the unannounced performance will be executed. becomes possible to execute. As a result, as in the case where additional performance information is presented, the player can play the notification game assuming the performance to be executed in the notification game based on the information specified from the notification performance regarding the unannounced performance. Since the player can enjoy the progress, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L6]
The gaming machine according to appendix L5, wherein the unannounced performance is the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6, the unannounced performance is a display performance. That is, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced display effect that is executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced display performance that will be executed after the third timing in the notification game, so that the unannounced display performance can be used instead of the specific type of notification performance. It becomes possible to execute notification effects. As a result, the player assumes the display performance to be executed in the notification game based on the information specified from the notification performance regarding the unannounced display performance, and the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while guessing the possibility (expectation level) of something.

[Appendix L7]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the predetermined condition is such that the result of the transition determination transitions to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L7, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state, so that when the execution of a specific type of notification presentation is restricted at the third timing, the anticipation that the result of the transition determination will transition to a special gaming state can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix M1]
A main control means (41) for making a transition judgment (a big win lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and for controlling the progress of a notification game (a variable game) for notifying the result of the transition judgment;
A notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification performances (preview performances);
A notification performance execution decision means (51) for deciding whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification performances;
A notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determination means (51);
a display performance execution means (51) for executing a display performance (e.g., a development performance) of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification performance of the predetermined notification content after the notification performance is executed when the notification performance (e.g., a development performance notice performance) of the predetermined notification content is executed;
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
A means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
A means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
having
a means for executing a notification performance of a notification content including, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing, as the notification performance when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing;
A gaming machine characterized in that the additional performance information is information related to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M1, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing is included as additional performance information as the notification performance. A notification presentation of the notification content is executed. In this way, when a specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content is notified as additional performance information that includes performance information that was not announced in the notification performance executed at the first timing. By executing the performance, when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, additional performance information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game by assuming the performance to be executed in the notification game based not only on the notification content of the specific type of notification performance but also on the additional performance information (performance information). This improves the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix M1, the additional performance information is information related to the notification content in a specific type of notification performance. In this way, since the additional performance information is information related to the notification content of the specific type of notification performance, the player can perform a display performance that is more advantageous than the display performance understood from the specific type of notification performance. This can be understood from the additional performance information. This allows the player to understand that the possibility (expectation level) that the result of the transition determination based on the additional performance information is that the transition will be made to the special gaming state is higher than what can be ascertained from the specific type of notification performance. Since this can be recognized, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the transition determination will be a transition to the special gaming state.

[Appendix M2]
The display performance includes a reach performance indicating that the multiple symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state during the period from when the variable display of the multiple symbols is started to when the multiple symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect will be executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M2, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that a reach effect will be executed as a display effect. In this way, because the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that a reach effect will be executed as a display effect, in addition to information about the reach effect specified from the specific type of notification effect, further information about the reach effect can be obtained from the additional effect information. This allows the player to know the content of the reach effect in more detail, and thus further enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the reach effect that will be executed in the notification game.

[Appendix M3]
The display effects include pseudo consecutive effects,
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1 or Appendix M2, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a pseudo continuous performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, since the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a pseudo-connection performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information regarding the pseudo-continuation performance specified from the specific type of notification performance, the relevant Information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance can be further obtained from the additional performance information. As a result, the player can know the content of the pseudo-continuous performance in more detail, and therefore can further enjoy the progress of the notification game assuming that it will be executed in the notification game.

[Appendix M4]
The display performance includes a transition notification performance indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M3, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the transition notification performance will be executed as the display performance.

[Appendix M5]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game state in which a second special game (variable jackpot game) that is more advantageous to a player than the first special game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix M4, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to appendix M4 and appendix M5, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special game state such as the second special game state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player can understand during the execution of the notification game that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game is to transition to a special game state and that the special game will be executed after the end of the notification game. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and can watch the progress of the notification game with excitement for the special game to be executed. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, the player can watch the progress of the notification game with excitement for the second special game to be executed because it is in a more advantageous state.

[Appendix N1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
Notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing multiple types of notification performances (notification performances);
notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects;
notification content determining means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determining means (51);
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect preview effect) is executed, after the execution of the notification effect, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect preview effect) is executed. a display effect execution means (51) for executing the effect (effect);
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is later than the first timing during execution of the notification game;
has
When the specific type of notification performance is executed at the second timing, the notification content includes performance information that was not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing as additional performance information. Equipped with a means to carry out notification performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification performance of the notification content including the additional performance information is executed when the specific type of notification performance is executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N1, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect whose notification content includes, as additional performance information, performance information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect is executed, so that when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification effect, the additional performance information can be obtained. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by anticipating the performance executed in the notification game based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also the additional performance information (performance information), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix N1, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed when a specific type of notification effect is executed at a first timing. That is, when a specific type of notification effect executed at a first timing is also executed at a second timing, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed. In this way, when a specific type of notification effect executed at a first timing is also executed at a second timing, a notification effect of notification content including additional performance information is executed, thereby freeing the player from the annoyance and frustration caused by the specific type of notification effect being executed repeatedly, and thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

[Appendix N2]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, from when the variable display of a plurality of symbols starts until the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed. including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in combination;
The gaming machine according to appendix N1, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the ready-to-win performance will be executed as the display performance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N2, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, since the notification performance of a specific type is a performance that notifies that a reach performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information regarding the reach performance specified from the notification performance of the specific type, the reach performance concerned Additional information can be obtained from additional performance information. Thereby, the player can know the content of the ready-to-win performance in more detail, and therefore can further enjoy the progress of the notification game assuming the ready-to-win performance executed in the notification game.

[Appendix N3]
The display effects include pseudo consecutive effects,
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N3, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a pseudo continuous performance will be executed as a display performance. In this way, since the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that a pseudo-connection performance will be executed as a display performance, in addition to the information regarding the pseudo-continuation performance specified from the specific type of notification performance, the relevant Information regarding the pseudo-continuous performance can be further obtained from the additional performance information. As a result, the player can know the content of the pseudo-continuous performance in more detail, and therefore can further enjoy the progress of the notification game assuming that it will be executed in the notification game.

[Appendix N4]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix N1 to Appendix N3, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the transition notification effect will be executed as the display effect.

[Appendix N5]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game (probable jackpot game) more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. a second special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to appendix N4, wherein the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the second special gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices N4 and N5, the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to shift to a special gaming state such as the second special gaming state. In this way, since the specific type of notification performance is a performance that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to move to a special game state such as the second special game state, the player can The result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game state, and it can be grasped during execution of the notification game that the special game will be executed after the notification game ends. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification performance, and can also enjoy the progress of the notification game while looking forward to the execution of the special game. You can watch over it. In particular, if the specific type of notification performance is a performance in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, Therefore, the player can look forward to the execution of the second special game and watch the progress of the notification game.

[Appendix O1]
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and notification is made to notify the result of the transition determination. A main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game (variable game);
Notification performance execution means (51) capable of executing multiple types of notification performances (notification performances);
notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects;
notification content determining means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determining means (51);
When the notification effect of a predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed, after the execution of the notification effect, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g. development effect preview effect) is executed. display effect execution means (51) for executing the effect);
Equipped with
The notification performance execution means (51)
means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game;
means (51) for executing the specific type of notification performance at a second timing that is later than the first timing during the execution of the notification game;
has
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the notification effect is a notification effect with notification content that includes information that was not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing. have the means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the information not notified in the notification performance executed at the first timing is determination information regarding the result of the transition determination by the main control means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O1, when a specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, a notification effect is executed whose notification content includes judgment information regarding the result of the transition judgment by the main control means, and which is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect. In this way, by executing a notification effect whose notification content includes judgment information that is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as a notification effect at the second timing, the player can obtain judgment information in addition to the notification content of the specific type of notification effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the notification game by inferring that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game is a jackpot based on not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect, but also the judgment information regarding the result of the transition judgment, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1, wherein the determination information includes information notifying that the result of the transition determination is that the special gaming state will be transitioned.

[Appendix O3]
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a first special game (normal jackpot game) is executed, and a second special game state in which a second special game (variable jackpot game) that is more advantageous to a player than the first special game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix O2, characterized in that the judgment information includes information that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note O2 and Supplementary Note O3, the judgment information includes information notifying that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state. In this way, by the judgment information including information notifying that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state, the player can know in advance that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state before the notification game is ended, and the player can enjoy playing the game with peace of mind.

[Appendix O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes O1 to 3, wherein the determination information includes information regarding the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the transition to the special gaming state will be made.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O4, the determination information includes information regarding the degree of expectation that the transition determination result will be transitioned to the special gaming state. In this way, by including information regarding the degree of expectation that the transition determination result will be transitioned to the special gaming state, the game can be improved by inferring the transition determination result for the notification game based on the information. You can enjoy the progress.

[Appendix O5]
A right reservation means (41) for reserving a right for an upper limit number of the notification games to be executed based on the result of the transition determination;
a reservation display means (341) capable of displaying the number of rights reserved by the right reservation means (41) as a reservation display;
Further equipped with
The reserve display means (341) is capable of displaying a notification game display for the notification game,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices O1 to O4, characterized in that the judgment information is presented by at least one of the hold display and the notification game display.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O5, the judgment information is presented by at least one of the hold display and the game notification display. That is, the judgment information is presented by so-called hold changes. In this way, by presenting the judgment information by hold changes, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the hold changes.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 316: Variable winning hole 341: Symbol display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp Part 355: Fifth individual lamp part 356: Sixth individual lamp part 37: Croon device 373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention part 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display Parts A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411:ROM
412:RAM
45: Setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511:ROM
512:RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

An information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in any one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate for transitioning to the special game state,
A storage means for storing first numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
a setting means for setting a state in which the transition determination is to be performed using each of the first numerical information;
a display control means for performing a display corresponding to any one of the transition determination states set by the setting means, in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means
a numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of second numerical information different from each of the first numerical information;
a means for displaying, in a specified area of the display means, multiple types of specific information displayed using numbers or letters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of second numerical information during a specified period from a specified start timing to a specified end timing when at least a gaming ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is established;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed in the predetermined area of the display means,
a display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
A counting means for counting based on the number of game balls entering the specific area;
a means for controlling the display of different numerical values on the display means in accordance with the counted number;
Equipped with
When a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player in a predetermined game state, the plurality of types of specific information displayed during the specified period in the past are configured to be visible;
The specified period is a period following the establishment of a reach state as a variable game that is carried out based on the result of the transition determination .

Images